JP6839455B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine including an effect control means for controlling the execution of an effect based on the result of determination as to whether or not to execute a special game.

For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and after the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, a symbol showing the result of the above determination is displayed. Stop is displayed. In this type of gaming machine, the customer waiting menu screen is displayed when the set time elapses after the transition to the customer waiting state, and the player performs a predetermined operation while the customer waiting menu screen is displayed to increase the volume. There is a gaming machine that displays a setting screen, a premier effect occurrence rate setting screen, or a light amount setting screen (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Patent No. 6152190

By the way, the screen displayed on the conventional game machine does not prompt the player whether or not to return the setting related to the effect to the initial setting, and there is room for improvement regarding the configuration for returning the setting related to the effect to the initial setting. there were.

Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately returning the settings related to the effect to the initial settings.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is
Input means that can be input by the player,
Judgment means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player,
And a presentation control means for controlling the effect based on the determination result of said determination means,
The effect control means
In the effect progress state in which the effect based on the determination result of the determination means progresses, the first setting related to the effect is changed according to the first input to the input means, and the effect is produced according to the second input to the input means. You can change the second setting for
Selection of whether or not to return the effect setting to the initial setting when the first time elapses without ending the non-effect progress state after shifting to the non-effect progress state in which the effect based on the determination result of the determination means does not progress. Start displaying the selection promotion screen that prompts the player to
If the input to the input means for selecting to return the rendering setup the initial setting is performed during the display of the selection prompt screen, the control section 10 ends displaying of the selected prompt screen, initializing the second set On the other hand, without returning the first setting to the initial setting ,
After the first time elapses after the transition to the non-effect progress state and the display of the selection promotion screen is started, the non-effect progress state does not end while the selection promotion screen remains displayed. When the second time longer than the first time elapses, the first setting is returned to the initial setting, and when the display of the selection promotion screen ends before the second time elapses, the first setting is performed. It is characterized in that the setting can be maintained.

According to the present invention, it is possible to appropriately return the setting related to the effect to the initial setting.

It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is the figure which shows the display which the game machine includes. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the game machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the big winning opening. It is a table which shows various random numbers acquired by a game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot judgment table, (B) is a jackpot type judgment table, (C) is a reach judgment table, (D) is a normal symbol hit judgment table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. It is a pattern selection table. It is a table which shows the fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of starting and entering a ball. It is a flowchart of a normal figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit / miss judgment process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a process during a normal symbol change. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessory processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 standby processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 changing process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 confirmation process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 standby processing. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 changing process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 determination process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 1. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 2. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of Example 2. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various setting of production. It is a screen view which illustrates various screens displayed on the 3rd display screen 72a. It is a screen view which shows the specific example of the customized number notification image and the customization content notification image displayed on the third display screen 72a. It is a screen view which illustrates the reset selection screen during a non-game displayed on the 1st display screen 7a. It is a time chart exemplifying the permission period of volume / light amount adjustment, effect customization, and reset selection during non-game. It is a flowchart which illustrates the winning-waiting command reception process executed in the sub-control board 90. It is a flowchart (the 1) which illustrates the operation correspondence processing executed on the sub-control board 90. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which illustrates the operation correspondence processing executed on the sub-control board 90. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the flow of the effect executed with the variation display of the 1st special symbol in a low probability low base state. It is a screen view which illustrates the screen composition of the 1st display screen 7a in a low accuracy low base state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various effect modes in a low accuracy low base state. It is a list exemplifying the features of each normal production mode. It is a screen view (No. 1) which illustrates the effect in the 4th normal mode. It is a screen view (No. 2) which illustrates the effect in the 4th normal mode. It is a screen view (No. 1) which illustrates the production in the 1st normal mode. It is a screen view (No. 2) which illustrates the production in the 1st normal mode. It is a screen view which illustrates the production in the 2nd normal mode. It is a screen view (No. 1) which illustrates the effect in the 3rd normal mode. It is a screen view (No. 2) which illustrates the effect in the 3rd normal mode. It is a screen view (No. 3) which illustrates the effect in the 3rd normal mode.

Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to examples. In the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable display of the symbol, the pachinko gaming machine capable of executing the winning game capable of giving a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) to the player. , An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50, and the gaming board 2 is a gaming machine. It is detachably configured from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the game board 2 is removed from the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for attaching a game board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko game machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island equipment, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56. Further, the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side end side (left side of the paper in FIG. 1) in the vertical direction, and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one side end side as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

Further, the front frame 51 can supply a launch handle 60 for launching a game ball with a firing intensity according to a player's operation amount (rotation angle), and a game ball that stores and stores the game ball to the launcher side. A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 61 are provided. Further, the front frame 51 includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (collectively, these two effect buttons) that can be operated by the player during execution of a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. (It is also simply referred to as "directing button 63"). As for the plurality of effect buttons, the effect buttons to be used can be used properly according to the type of game effect. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the embodiment of the first embodiment, and any input detecting means (for example,) that can detect the input from the player or that the player directly contacts the button portion to input the effect button 63. , Appearance type, touch sensor type, etc.), or non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects that a part of the player's body is in close proximity and inputs. Good.

Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and an image display device (second image display device 71, third image display device 72). Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the player can easily see the display screens 71a and 72a. It is installed so as to protrude toward the surface and to be inclined outward. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, similarly to the image display device 7 to be described later, depending on the execution / non-execution of the game, the situation of the game, the game effect to be executed, and the like. Game production (characters, production patterns, etc.), demo production, information about the game (acquired ball information, number of rounds, number of consecutive villas, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability / explanation of game production, etc.) , Information on game machine settings (volume setting information, brightness setting information, etc.) is displayed. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information or display the same information among these information. Further, the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information as when different information is displayed. There are cases where it is done. Further, any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information, and the remaining one displays different information. May be displayed. It should be noted that any or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as an "image display device".

Further, the image display device 7 is provided in the inner region of the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in the outer region of the game area 3. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open side end portion) is attached to the front frame 51 via the second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). Has been done. Therefore, the hinges 75 for the upper and lower second image display devices can be rotated in the left-right direction as an axis. More specifically, the configuration is such that it can rotate a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) to the right from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because the second image display device 71, which is provided so as to project forward of the front frame 51 when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56 as axes, pachinko. This is a configuration to prevent damage due to collision with hall equipment (ball lending machine, inter-table equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (left side of the paper in FIG. 1) of the game machine 1. .. On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the end on the open side) is fixed to the front frame 51 and is non-rotatable.

The game board 2 is formed with a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down, surrounded by a rail member 4. Further, the game board 2 is provided with a board surface lamp 5 for decoration. A plurality of game nails 16 for guiding a game ball are projected in the game area 3. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

Further, an image display device 7 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back surface side of the game board 2. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as "effect symbols") are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and the effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as "effect symbol display unit"). ) Is provided, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the gaming state according to the gaming state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state, low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state). The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol described later) set as the main body of the game in. The production symbol 8L is also referred to as a "left symbol", the production symbol 8C is also referred to as a "middle symbol", and the production symbol 8R is also referred to as a "right symbol".

The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the game state is in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A, which will be described later). As will be described in detail later, in this low probability low base state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the start port (second start port 21) is set lower than in the high base state (first game state). At the same time, the probability of winning / failing the special symbol (the first special symbol hit / fail judgment and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment) is low (also referred to as “predetermined probability”), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is the first special symbol. It is set longer (more than twice) than the fluctuation time of (all deviation fluctuations are 10 minutes). Therefore, in the normal state, the game ball is launched into the right game area 3B (second game area) and entered into the start port (second start port 21 or third start port 26) to display the second special symbol in a variable manner. It is more advantageous for the player to play a game in which the game ball is launched into the left game area 3A (first game area) and entered into the first starting port 20 to display the first special symbol in a variable manner. Has been done. That is, in the normal state, it can be said that the game state is a game state in which the first special symbol (directed symbol) is mainly used for variable display. Therefore, in the normal state (state A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b are configured to perform variable display and stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol.

Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. Depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols displayed (derived display) in the effect symbol display area 7b, the first special symbol display 41a (“first”) described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the "special symbol display unit") and the second special displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display unit"). The result of the variation display of the symbol (the result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize it. In addition, any (or all) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information". Further, the special symbol hit / fail judgment is also simply referred to as "hit / fail judgment" or "first hit / fail judgment". Further, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the special symbol winning / failing determination is also referred to as a "winning / failing determination executing means" or a "first hit / fail determination executing means".

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (first specific hit), the production symbol is stopped with the same three-digit doublet (also called "big hit symbol") such as "777". indicate. In addition, in the case of a small hit (second specific hit), a preset chance symbol such as "135" or a special symbol for small hits such as "3 ★ 3" (also referred to as a "small hit symbol") is used. Stop and display the design. It should be noted that, when a small hit occurs, the symbol dedicated to the small hit may be stopped and displayed, and the symbol of the same aspect may be stopped and displayed for the small hit symbol and the off symbol. In addition, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit symbols (first small hit symbol, second small hit symbol, etc.) can be distinguished from each other. ) May be stopped and displayed, or the same (common) small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish them.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is incorrect, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is stopped and displayed as a different design ("Missing symbol"). Also called). As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (result of the special symbol winning / failing determination) by looking at the stopped display of the effect symbol. That is, in general, the player does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but rather directs the result. The effect symbol 8 displayed in the symbol display area 7b is viewed and grasped. Further, as the execution mode of the variable display of the effect symbol, for example, a mode of scrolling display in the up / down, left / right, diagonal directions, etc. In addition to 7b, one or both of the second effect symbol display unit 71a and the third effect symbol display unit 72a are used to display the effect. In addition to this, it may have an aspect in which the effect is displayed using only the second effect symbol display unit 71a or the third effect symbol display unit 72a.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying a game effect (effect symbol game effect) using the effect symbol as described above, it is executed in association with the hit game (big hit game, small hit game). The hit game production (big hit game production, small hit game production) and the demonstration production for waiting for customers are displayed. In addition, in the production pattern game production, the winning game production, and the demonstration production, in addition to the production symbols such as numbers, the production images other than the production symbols such as the background image and the character image are also displayed. Further, as will be described in detail later, the game state (state A, state B or state C), the state in which the game ball is fired in the left game area 3A to play the game, or the game ball is fired in the right game area 3B. The display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b is different depending on whether the game is being played or the like. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously) in a variable manner, and is a game of this type. The machine is also called a "simultaneous variable machine (parallel variable machine)".

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying the first effect hold 9a according to the number of storages of the first special figure hold, which will be described later, is displayed. There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) that displays the second effect hold 9b according to the number of storages of the second special figure hold, which will be described later. Depending on the display mode (number of displays) of the first effect hold 9a or the second effect hold 9b in the effect hold display area, the first special figure hold display 43a (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, displays the first special figure hold. The number of memories of the second special figure hold and the number of memories of the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The display position of the first effect hold display unit and the display position of the second effect hold display unit may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect (reach effect, etc.) to be executed. In addition, only one of the first effect hold display unit and the second effect hold display unit (for example, only the effect hold display unit corresponding to the main special symbol (effect symbol) depending on the game state) is displayed. It may be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. At the lower part of the center decorative body 10, a stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll is provided. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet, receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp inlet, discharges the game ball from the warp outlet, and guides the game ball to the stage portion 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 has a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage portion 11, and can enter the first starting port 20 described later. Further, above the center decorative body 10, an illuminated member (board lamp 5) such as an LED is provided and can be turned on according to the game state, and a decorative member 13 in the shape of characters, figures, or the like is arranged. There is.

Further, a movable decorative member 14 that is above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 is provided so as to be able to move along with the game effect. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward (predetermined) with the execution of the game effect having a relatively high possibility of hitting. The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 becomes visible. As a result, the player enhances the interest in the game and raises the expectation for the hit.

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 provided with a non-variable first starting port 20 in which the ease of entering the game ball does not change is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct ( The first special symbol hit / fail judgment, the first hit / fail judgment) is executed, the first special symbol starts the variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / miss judgment.

Above the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3, the gate 28 (normal drawing start port, pass port, ball entry port, and specific start) through which the game ball can pass (enter) (Also called a mouth) is provided. The game ball that has entered from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down the game area 3 in the downstream direction. The gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also referred to as a combination gate or an operation gate) for starting a big hit game. That is, this gate is a gate 28 and also a start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes) into the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation condition) is satisfied, it is normal. Along with executing the symbol hit / fail judgment (also referred to as "normal symbol hit / fail judgment" or "third hit / fail judgment"), the normal symbol starts to change and display, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed based on the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment. Stop display. When the hit normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opens) and the second starting port 21 is opened. Further, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the normal symbol hit / miss determination as to whether or not the movable member 23 is operated (opened) to open the second starting port 21 is a "hit / fail determination executing means". It is also referred to as a "third hit / miss determination execution means". The gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game. That is, the sensor that detects the entry into the main gate is the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

Further, as will be described in detail later, when passing through the gate 28 (start gate 29), the function as the start gate 29 is exhibited when the conditions for executing the big hit game are satisfied (“big hit”). It is also called "executable state" or "big hit standby state"). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) when the condition (big hit standby state) is not satisfied, the control process related to the normal symbol is performed and the big hit start process is not executed. If the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is satisfied (in the jackpot standby state), the standby jackpot game starts and the predetermined jackpot (big hit opening) ( The round game in which the first large winning opening 30) is opened (the ball can be entered) starts.

In the game area 3 on the right side of the center decoration 10 (right game area 3B) in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29), a first large winning opening 30 is provided. A large winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable entrance") is provided. The first prize-winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and the opening / closing member 32 opens and closes the first prize-winning opening 30. The opening / closing member 32 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface, and in the closed state, the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 is closed and the game ball is placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32. It is possible to pass through. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 without entering the first large winning opening 30. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 32 retracts toward the back surface of the game board 3 to form the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 forming the game ball passage. Is gone. As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the first large winning opening 30 will enter the first large winning opening 30. In this way, the opening / closing member 32 that opens / closes the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 is a retractable opening / closing member, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game ball that has flowed down is smoothly moved to the first large. In addition to allowing the ball to enter the winning opening 30, the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) can be guided in an arbitrary direction (the second starting port 21 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It will be possible. It should be noted that the first large winning opening 30 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, in the first large winning device 31 (first variable ball entry port), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32 causes the game ball to enter the ball in an inaccessible state (closed state) and the game ball to enter. It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first large winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game ball does not change. A second fixed winning device 25 including a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting port 26, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is correct ( The second special symbol hit / fail judgment, the second hit / fail judgment) is executed, the second special symbol starts the variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / miss judgment. The game ball passage is branched below (downstream) of the first winning opening 30 (upper and lower), and the upper game ball passage provided with the third starting port 26, the second starting opening 31 and the second starting opening 31 and the first. A lower side game ball passage in which the two major winning openings 35 are provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third start port 26 by coming into contact with the game nail 16 provided in the vicinity of the third start port 26. Alternatively, the ball flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. In addition, since the third starting port 26 is a fixed winning device (ball entrance) that allows the player to enter the ball at all times, the left-handed game becomes a big hit (so-called first hit), and the first big hit game is hit right. When executed in the game, the game ball can be entered (held) into the third start port 26 during the big hit game, and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the end of the big hit game.

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first large winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game ball changes. A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable start port” or a “variable start port”) including the second start port 21 of the formula is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct (first). (1) Special symbol hit / miss determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.

The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an “opening / closing member”), and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second starting port 21 can be changed from the first aspect (closed state) to the second aspect (open state) in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect. is there. In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 is capable of entering the game ball only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and is unable to enter the game ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. The second starting port 21 is perfect when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the game ball is in the open state. It does not have to be the one that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

Further, like the opening / closing member 32, the movable member 23 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface, and in the closed state, the entrance of the second starting port 21 is closed and the movable member 23 is said to be closed. The game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21. It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the movable member 23 is driven by the second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 retracts in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance of the second starting port 21. As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second starting port 21 enters the second starting port 21. In this way, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game ball that has flowed down can be seen. The ball is smoothly entered into the second starting port 21, and the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) is passed through the inclined upper surface passage in any direction (the second major winning opening 35, which will be described later). Induce to.

In this way, in a state where the game ball is launched into the right side area (right game area 3B) and the game is played, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol winning / failing determination is executed. When the first special symbol is variablely displayed and the game ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / fail determination is executed and the second special symbol is variablely displayed. Therefore, in the state in which the game ball is launched into the right side area (right game area 3B) and the game is performed (right-handed game), the game state in which the game is mainly performed by displaying the variation of the first special symbol (state B: low accuracy). It has a base state (high accuracy and high base state) and a gaming state (state C: high accuracy and low base state) in which the game is mainly performed by displaying the variation of the second special symbol.

Further, in the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the second start opening 21, a second large winning opening 35 is provided. A large winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable entrance") is provided. The second prize-winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member 37, and opens and closes the second prize-winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. Like the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface, and in the closed state, the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 is closed and the opening / closing member 37 is opened / closed. The game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 without entering the second large winning opening 35. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 37 retracts in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The opening / closing member 37 that had been used disappears from the entrance of the second large winning opening 35. As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 will enter the second large winning opening 35. In this way, the opening / closing member 37 that opens / closes the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down when in the open state (when opened). Is smoothly entered into the second large winning opening 35, and the game ball that has flowed down when in the closed state (when closed) is guided in an arbitrary direction (out opening 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. It should be noted that the second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. That is, in the second large winning device 36 (second variable entry port), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 37 allows the game ball to enter the ball in an inaccessible state (closed state) and the game ball to enter. It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

Further, a plurality (three) general entry ports 27 are provided in the game area below the left side area (left game area 3A) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3. The game area 3 in which various entrances and the like are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. Can be divided into. A method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called a left-handed hit, and a method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called a right-handed hit. .. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) at the start of the game is left-handed to aim at entering the first starting port 20. That is, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game mainly in which the player enters the first starting port 20 by left-handed (determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct).

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (first special symbol hit / fail judgment), the big hit game and after the big hit game (special game) is completed (low accuracy, high base state, high accuracy). In the high base state or high accuracy low base state), right-handed to enter the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30, the second starting opening 21, the third starting opening 26, or the second big winning opening 35. It will be a game aiming at the ball. Specifically, when a big hit is made in a left-handed game, first, the big hit standby state is set, and the right-handed game is aimed at entering the gate 28. Next, when the ball enters the gate 28 (start gate 29) in the big hit standby state, the big hit game starts, and the right-handed game mainly aims at entering the first big winning opening 30.

Further, when the big hit game ends and the game state after the big hit game ends becomes the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state (state B), it mainly goes to the gate 28 (normal figure gate) and the second starting port 21. It will be a right-handed game aiming at the entry of the ball. On the other hand, when the big hit game is completed and the game state after the big hit game is in the high accuracy low base state (state C), the right-handed game aiming at entering the third start opening 26 and the second big winning opening 35 Become. That is, the low-accuracy high-base state and the high-accuracy high-base state (state B) are right-handed games mainly in which the ball enters the second starting port 21 (first special symbol hit / fail judgment) by right-handed hitting, and the high-accuracy is high. The low base state (state C) is a right-handed game in which the ball enters the third starting port 26 (the second special symbol hit / fail determination) by right-handed hitting. As a result, even in the same right-handed game, the main starting port (target of the special symbol winning / failing determination) differs depending on the game state (state B or state C).

Further, in the right game area 3B (second game area), a second out port 34b is provided on the upstream side of the gate 28, and the game ball flowing into the game area downstream of the gate 28 of the right game area 3B. The amount can be adjusted (decreased). That is, the second out port 34b is installed on the upstream side of all the ball entry ports installed in the right game area 3B, and the game nails provided in the vicinity of the second out port 34b allow the ball entry ports to be opened. The rate of entry of game balls into the installation area (ratio of entry) can be adjusted. Further, in the right game area 3B (second game area), the third out port 34c is located downstream of the second starting port 21 and upstream of the second large winning opening 35, which is a large winning opening for small hits. Is provided. With this third out port 34c, the rate of entry of the game ball into the game area on the side of the second large winning opening 35 when a small hit occurs, that is, the rate of entry of the game ball into the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game. It is adjustable. A game nail provided in the vicinity of the third out opening 34c makes it possible to adjust the entry ratio (entry ratio) of the game ball into the second large winning opening 35.

Then, when a game ball enters the first start opening 20, the second start opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, the second big winning opening 35, and the general entry opening 27, each entry opening is used. A predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as "prize balls" and "game profits") are paid out (given) in. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (amount of game profit) paid out based on the entry into the first large winning opening 30 is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35. It is set more than the number (amount of game profit). Specifically, the first big winning opening 30 pays out 15 prize balls for one winning ball, and the second big winning opening 35 pays out 10 prize balls for one winning ball. The prize ball is to be paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. On the main display 40, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol display for variable display and stop display of the second special symbol are displayed. A device 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of a normal symbol (also referred to as "specific identification information") are included. Further, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored numbers of the hit / fail determination information (first special symbol hold) related to the first special symbol, and a hit / fail determination information (first) related to the second special symbol. Includes a second special figure hold indicator 43b that displays the number of stored items of 2 special figure hold) and a normal figure hold indicator 44 that displays the number of stored operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. ing.

Further, the main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. A round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, a game state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and the launch direction of the game ball, that is, the right A launch direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether the player should hit the ball or hit the ball to the left. Further, the main display 40 includes a variable state indicator 49 indicating a variable state (c1) of the first special symbol, a variable state (c2) of the second special symbol, and a variable state (c3) of the normal symbol. There is. The various indicators included in the main indicator 40 are displayed and controlled by the main control unit described later.

The variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting port 26. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. Further, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure holding display unit 43.

In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped, and the special symbol (stop symbol) displayed as a stop is displayed to display the first start port 20 and the second start port 20. The result of the hit / fail judgment (special symbol hit / fail judgment, big hit lottery) based on the entry into the 21 or the third starting port 26 is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct. When the stop symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), it is an open pattern according to the type of the specific special symbol displayed as a stop. A special game (big hit game, small hit game) that opens the 1st big winning opening 30 or the 2nd big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning opening (first large winning opening 30 and / or second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is displayed. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is the 4R first big hit, the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off. When the 4R second big hit is reached, the four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. In addition, when it comes off, the two LEDs of "lo" can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. Further, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination. Similar to the first special symbol display 41b, the stop display mode is defined as a different display mode depending on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination (big hit, small hit, miss). Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before the derivation display), the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, from left to right in a predetermined order. Each LED can be turned on so that light flows repeatedly to the light.

As described above, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are each composed of a plurality of LEDs (display units), and during the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 41a A plurality of LEDs corresponding to are lit (blinking) in a predetermined order, and when the fluctuation time elapses, the first special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is displayed by the jackpot type (one mode if one type). ), Small hit type (1 mode if 1 type) and off type (1 mode if 1 type) are stopped and displayed.

Further, the fluctuation state display 49 includes a display unit c1 (LEDc1), a display unit c2 (LEDc2), and a display unit c3 (LEDc3), and the display unit c1 indicates the fluctuation state of the first special symbol, and the display unit. The fluctuating state of the second special symbol is indicated by c2, and the fluctuating state of the normal symbol is indicated by the display unit c3. Specifically, the display unit c1 indicating the fluctuation state of the first special symbol is composed of one LED (display unit) which is a smaller number of LEDs (display unit, display unit) than the first special symbol display 41a. Has been done. Then, during the variable display of the first special symbol, the blinking display is performed, and when the variable time of the first special symbol elapses, the stop display is performed in the display mode according to the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination. Specifically, in the case of a miss, the light is turned off and the stop is displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the stop is displayed in red regardless of the big hit type. In addition, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is interrupted (paused), it is stopped and displayed by lighting in yellow.

Therefore, the display unit c1 is displayed in a blinking manner during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, is displayed in yellow while the fluctuation display is interrupted, is displayed in red when the jackpot symbol is stopped, and the missed symbol is stopped. Is turned off (hidden). Thereby, by looking at the display unit c1 of the fluctuation state display 49, it is possible to grasp the fluctuation state (during, interrupted, stopped, hit / fail determination result) of the first special symbol. Further, since the variable state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators is small) than the first special symbol display 41a, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type in detail, but the variable state is present. Can be easily grasped. Further, the variable state display 49 (display unit c1) functions as a second first special symbol display 41a. In addition, "interruption of variation display" is a process that can be performed when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol (second special symbol) executed at the same time is a big hit, and the variation display is temporarily interrupted. Then, after the cancellation condition is satisfied, the variable display is restarted.

Further, the display unit c2 indicating the fluctuation state of the second special symbol is one LED (display unit, display) which is a smaller number of LEDs (display unit, display) than the second special symbol display 41b, similarly to the display unit c1. It is composed of a display unit). Then, during the variation display of the second special symbol, the blinking display is performed, and when the variation time of the second special symbol elapses, the stop display is performed in the display mode according to the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination. Specifically, if it is off, it will be turned off and stopped, if it is a big hit, it will be stopped and displayed in red regardless of the big hit type, and if it is a small hit, it will be turned on in green regardless of the small hit type (small hit mode). Stop display with. In addition, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is interrupted (paused), it is stopped and displayed by lighting in yellow.

Therefore, the display unit c2 is displayed in blinking during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, is displayed in yellow while the fluctuation display is interrupted, is displayed in red when the jackpot symbol is stopped, and the small hit symbol is stopped. The inside is lit in green, and the off symbol is turned off (hidden) while it is stopped. Thereby, by looking at the display unit c2 of the fluctuation state display 49, it is possible to grasp the fluctuation state (changing, interrupting, stopping, hit / fail determination result) of the second special symbol. Further, since the variable state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators is small) than the second special symbol indicator 41b, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type in detail, but the variable state is present. Can be easily grasped. Further, the variable state display 49 (display unit c2) functions as a second second special symbol display 41b.

The display mode (design) displayed on the display unit c1 of the variable state display 49 is also referred to as a "first state symbol" or a "first sub-symbol". Further, since the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination can be confirmed from the stop mode of the display unit c1, it is also referred to as "first confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as" confirmation symbol ")". Further, the display mode (symbol) displayed on the display unit c2 is also referred to as a "second state symbol" or a "second sub symbol". Further, since the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination can be confirmed from the stop mode of the display unit c2, it is also referred to as "second confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as" confirmation symbol ")". In addition, the first state symbol corresponds to the variation display and the stop display of the first special symbol, and the second state symbol corresponds to the variation display and the stop display of the second special symbol. Variable display and stop display are displayed. Therefore, if the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is wrong, the first state symbol is stopped and displayed when it is turned off (off mode), and in the case of a big hit, it lights up in red regardless of the big hit type (big hit mode). Stop display with. The relationship between the second special symbol and the second state symbol is also the same.

Further, the display unit c3 indicating the fluctuation state of the normal symbol is a single LED (display unit) which is a smaller number of LEDs (display unit, display unit) than the normal symbol display 42, similarly to the display unit c1. It is configured. Then, during the variable display of the normal symbol, the blinking display is performed, and when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol elapses, the stop display is performed in the display mode according to the result of the normal symbol hit / miss determination. Specifically, if it is off, it is turned off and stopped, and if it is hit, it is turned on in red regardless of the hit type. In addition, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is interrupted (paused), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

Therefore, the display unit c3 is displayed blinking while the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed, is lit in yellow while the fluctuation display is interrupted, is lit in red when the hit symbol is stopped, and is turned off when the off symbol is stopped. (Hidden). As a result, by looking at the display unit c3 of the fluctuation state display 49, it is possible to grasp the fluctuation state (during, interrupted, stopped, hit / fail determination result) of the normal symbol. Further, since the variable state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators is small) than the normal symbol display 42, it is difficult to grasp the hit type and the like in detail, but the variable state is easy. It becomes possible to grasp.

The display mode (design) displayed on the display unit c3 of the variable state display 49 is also referred to as a "first state normal symbol" or a "first sub-normal symbol". In addition, the first state normal symbol displays the fluctuation and the stop corresponding to the fluctuation display and the stop display of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is wrong, it is turned off (off mode) and stopped and displayed, and if it is hit, it is turned on in red (hit mode) regardless of the hit type.

In this embodiment, a special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) and a variable state indicator 49 are provided, and the variable state of the special symbol can be grasped by any of them. , When any LED of the special symbol display (1st special symbol display 41a, 2nd special symbol display 41b) having a large number of LEDs capable of grasping the fluctuation state in detail fails (damage, disconnection, etc.) However, the fluctuation state indicator 49 makes it possible to grasp the approximate fluctuation state. The same applies to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable state display 49. Further, in the present embodiment, the display control of both the special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) and the variable state display 49 is performed by the main control unit.

Here, among the stop display modes (display results of variable display) of special symbols and effect symbols, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit (big hit or small hit) is referred to as "hit mode". , "Specific mode", "Specific display mode" or "Specific display result", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is out of order is referred to as "off mode" or "non-specific mode". , "Non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result". Further, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit is also referred to as the "big hit mode", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a small hit is "small". It is also called "hit mode". Further, it refers to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display unit), and the special symbol display unit 41. It is also called "variable display means" or "identification information display means".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20, the second start port 21, or the third start port 26, various types of random numbers for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct are used based on the entry of the game ball. Information (also referred to as “acquired information”) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure holding storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Specifically, if the information is acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, it is stored as the first special figure hold (also referred to as "first acquisition information"). If the information is stored in the unit 85a and acquired based on the entry into the third starting port 26, it is stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 85b as the second special figure reservation (also referred to as "second acquisition information"). Will be done. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four each. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are also generally referred to as "acquisition information storage means". ..

The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the special symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not corresponding to the special symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the second start port 21, or the third start port 26 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry. That is, during the execution of the variable display of each special symbol or the execution of the special game based on any of the special symbol hit / fail judgments, the special symbol hit / fail judgment for the entry is made up to a predetermined number (4 each). It is possible to reserve (hold) the right of.

The number of such special figure hold indicators is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure hold, the first special figure is held. It displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of holds is 0, both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off, such as “u ● v □”. Further, when the number of holds is 3, the display mode can be such that both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u ● v ●". Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green as in "u ▲ v ▲" to set the display mode. Further, the second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the second special figure hold, the second special figure hold is held. It displays a number. For example, when the number of holds is 0, both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the number of holds 1 to 1 No. 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure holding indicator 43a.

The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable time for a predetermined time, then stopped and displayed, and the result of the normal symbol hit / fail determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is determined by the stopped display normal symbol (stop symbol). Notify. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is correct. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game (“specific game”” in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. Also called) is performed. Further, the means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as the auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment depending on the lighting mode. Is. For example, when the determination result is a hit, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed when both LEDs are lit, such as "s ■ t ■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). Further, when the determination result is out of order, an out-of-order normal symbol in a mode in which only the t LED is lit, such as "s □ t ■", is displayed. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined fluctuation time. The variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off.

When the game ball passes through the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as “acquired information”) such as random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct based on the passage of the game ball, and the acquired various information. Is temporarily stored as a normal figure hold in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set for the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not corresponding to the normal symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of passing, that is, during the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Can reserve (hold) the right to judge whether or not a normal symbol is correct for the passage of a predetermined number of cards.

The number of the normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. Specifically, the normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs according to the number of normal figure hold. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of q is turned off and the LED of r is turned on in red as in "q □ r ●". Further, the number of hold numbers 2 to 4 is also defined in the same manner as in the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a main control board 80 (“main control unit” or “main control unit”) that controls game profits such as a special symbol hit / fail judgment, a normal symbol hit / miss judgment, and a transition of a game state. (Also referred to as "game control unit"), sub-control board 90 (also referred to as "sub-control unit", "sub-control unit", or "effect control unit") that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and a game ball. The payout control board 110 (also referred to as “payout control unit”) that controls the payout, the effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, the pattern displayed on the effect display 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, It also includes an image control board 100 (image control unit) that controls the display of the fourth effect hold display 103b and the like. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case containing the main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear surface side (back surface side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and above the main control board case, there is a main control board storage case. An image control board storage case containing the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided, and a sub control board storage case containing the sub control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. It is provided. Further, a payout control board case for accommodating the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for accommodating the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

A game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure holding storage unit 85 (first special figure holding storage unit 85a and second special figure holding storage unit 85b) and the normal drawing holding storage unit 86. ..

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, as the sensors, the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the third start port sensor 26a, the gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a), the first grand prize opening sensor 30a, the second The large winning opening sensor 35a and the general entry opening sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

The first start port sensor 20a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 21. The third start port sensor 26a is provided in the third start port 26 and detects a game ball that has entered the third start port 26. The gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first large winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second large winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35. The general ball entry sensor 27a is provided in each general ball entry port 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general ball entry port 27.

Further, as the solenoids, the second starting port solenoid 24, the first winning opening solenoid 33, and the second winning opening solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36. Further, on the main control board 80, a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and the like are commonly used. Figure Hold indicator 44, variable state indicator 49, round indicator 45, game status indicator 46, launch direction indicator 47, and hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main indicators 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. A payout device 120 for paying out prize balls and rental balls and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). Is connected. The launcher 112 includes a launch handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually on the left side of the paper in FIG. 1), and the player performs a predetermined ball lending operation to insert a prepaid card (game). It enables ball lending based on the information stored in the value storage medium) or the like.

The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 uses the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. Drive to pay out prize balls and pay out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 of the launching device 112 (see FIG. 1), the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the firing handle 60, and the firing volume 115 is the firing handle 60. Detects the amount of rotation. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a one-chip microcomputer 91 for effect control (“microcomputer for effect control”) that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub-control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. There is. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached.

An image control board 100, a voice control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 is used as the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, third image display device 72, effect display 102, third effect hold display 103a, and fourth effect hold display 103b. Let control be performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including production symbols, reserved symbols, etc.). Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, the display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display 102 is composed of two LEDs, one of which performs a variable display and a stop display in accordance with the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED displays the variable display of the second special symbol. A display mode in which variable display and stop display are performed in accordance with the stop display, and the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment) is shown by turning on / off the corresponding LED or by color. Stop display with. Similarly, the third effect hold indicator 103a and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b also consist of two LEDs, respectively. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs or combining colors, the third effect hold display 103a is displayed by the number of holds displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c and the first special figure hold display 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode that indicates the same number of holds as the number of holds. Further, the fourth effect hold display 103b is display-controlled in a display mode showing the same number of holds as the number of holds displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the number of holds displayed by the second special figure hold display 43b. To.

The character symbol is displayed on a part or substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated in front of the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit) to display the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit). By covering a part or substantially the entire part), a part or all of the effect symbol 8, the first effect hold display unit 9c, or the second effect hold display unit 9d may be invisible. is there. Even in such a covered state, these effect display 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, and so on, so that the variation display and stop display of the effect symbol, the number of hold items, and the like can be surely confirmed. A fourth effect holding indicator 103b is provided. The display modes of the effect display 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b are always visible without being hindered by the operation of the movable decorative member 14. It has become. Further, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, or the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the light emission pattern data (lighting / extinguishing, light emitting color, etc.) of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Also referred to as lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible in FIG. 1, it is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines and determines the operation pattern data (also referred to as “drive data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. The movement of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the movement pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, on the sub-control board 90, the first effect button detection switch 63c and the first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.) 2 The effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

Next, the control related to the determination of whether or not the special symbol is correct in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, it has "big hit", "small hit", and "missing". At the time of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. Further, in the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. Further, in the case of "off", the "off symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. If it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, a "special game" is executed in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened with an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol displayed as stopped. .. A special game executed as a big hit is called a "big hit game", and a special game executed as a small hit is called a "small hit game".

There are a plurality of types of hits, and the hit type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed according to the result (specific result) of the special symbol winning / failing determination. That is, different hit types (big hits) depending on whether the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is the first specific result, the second specific result, the third specific result, another specific result, or the like. , Including small hits). In addition, the special game to be executed may differ depending on the hit type, and the amount of game profit that can be obtained differs depending on the special game, or the game state after the special game ends may differ. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are "15R (round) 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", and "15Rth". There are "5 big hits", "2R 6th big hits", and "2R 7th big hits". In "15R 1st big hit" and "15R 5th big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 15 times. Further, in "4R 2nd big hit", "4R 3rd big hit", and "4R 4th big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening of the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 4 times. In "2R 6th big hit" and "2R 7th big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 2 times. In this way, in the big hit, the first big winning opening 30 is opened and the second big winning opening 35 is not opened. For this reason, the first big winning opening 30 is also referred to as a "big hit big winning opening (big hit variable entry opening)".

In addition, "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "15R 5th jackpot", and "2R 6th jackpot" indicate the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. , Move to the high probability state described later (activate the probability change function). Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also referred to as "probability variation jackpots (high probability jackpots)". This high probability state (probability change function) continues until the next big hit occurs. Further, the "4R 4th jackpot" and the "2R 7th jackpot" shift the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to the low probability state described later (the probability variation function is not activated). Therefore, these two types of jackpots are also referred to as "low probability jackpots (low probability jackpots, normal jackpots)".

In addition, "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot" set the variation time of the 2nd special symbol to a short time after the end of the jackpot game. Activate "function" and do not activate high base generation function. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (state C). This high-accuracy low-base state continues until the next big hit occurs. In this high-accuracy low-base state, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is longer than that of the low-accuracy low-base state, low-accuracy high-base state, and high-accuracy high-base state. It is set. In particular, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is incorrect, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (see FIG. 9).

Further, the game playability in the high accuracy and low base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but as described above, the third start is performed by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged. Let the ball enter the mouth 26. Then, the second special symbol hit / fail determination is performed, a small hit is generated, and the game ball can be increased in the period (between the big hits) between the previous big hit and the next big hit. In addition, by making small hits occur frequently in the high accuracy and low base state during the big hits, it can be expected that many game balls will be acquired in a short period of time by the small hits. That is, it is a period that is advantageous for the player and a period in which it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the "4R 4th jackpot" and the "2R 7th jackpot" activate the "first special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" after the jackpot game is completed. Due to the operation of the first special symbol time reduction function, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is shorter than that when the first special symbol time reduction function is not activated (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state). Set to time. Since the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the game state after the end of these big hit games becomes a low accuracy and high base state. In the case of "4R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot", the low accuracy high base state ends based on the occurrence of the next jackpot or the execution of the variation display of the special symbol 100 times. .. When the special symbol variation display ends based on being executed 100 times, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). Further, as will be described in detail later, in the low accuracy and high base state, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged as described above, and then the next It is a period in which the game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, the "4R 3rd big hit" and the "2R 6th big hit" activate the "1st special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" after the end of the big hit game. Since the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the game state after the end of these big hit games becomes a high accuracy and high base state. In the case of "4R 3rd jackpot" and "2R 6th jackpot", the "1st special symbol time saving function" and "high base generation function" continue until the next jackpot occurs. Also, as mentioned above, the "probability change function" will continue until the next big hit occurs. That is, in the case of "4R 3rd big hit" and "2R 6th big hit", the high accuracy high base state (1st special symbol time saving state) is set after the big hit game is completed until the next big hit occurs.

In the high-accuracy high-base state, as in the low-accuracy high-base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made, and the game is expected to occur in the next big hit. As mentioned above, the high-accuracy and low-base state is a period to be performed, and as described above, many game balls are played in a short period of time by making small hits frequently while executing the second special symbol hit / fail judgment by right-handed games. It is a favorable period for the player, who can also expect to acquire. It should be noted that there are more game balls that can be acquired in the high accuracy and low base state than those that can be acquired in the high accuracy and high base state.

In addition, the high accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game (4R 3rd big hit game) related to "4R 3rd big hit" and the low after the end of the big hit game (4R 4th big hit game) related to "4R 4th big hit". By executing a common game effect (first game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the highly accurate base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the common fluctuation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high-accuracy high-base state or low-accuracy high-base state) is not notified (difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot was "4R 3rd jackpot", the high accuracy and high base state continued even after the variation display of the special symbol had passed 100 times, and it was "4R 4th jackpot". In this case, the gaming state becomes a low-probability low-base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays with the expectation that the high-accuracy and high-base state will continue even after 100 times have passed, regardless of the game state, and enhances the interest of the game. In the low-accuracy high-base state or the high-accuracy high-base state, that is, in the high-base state, the player does not reduce the number of balls held so much (in a state where the rate of decrease of the balls held is slower than in the low-accuracy low-base state). It can be performed.

Similarly, after the end of the big hit game (2R 6th big hit game) related to "2R 6th big hit" and the high accuracy high base state, and after the end of the big hit game (2R 7th big hit game) related to "2R 7th big hit" By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the low accuracy and high base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. To do. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the common fluctuation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high-accuracy high-base state or low-accuracy high-base state) is not notified (difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot was "2R 6th jackpot", the high accuracy and high base state continued even after the variation display of the special symbol had passed 100 times, and it was "2R 7th jackpot". In this case, the gaming state becomes a low-probability low-base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays with the expectation that the high-accuracy and high-base state will continue even after 100 times have passed, regardless of the game state, and enhances the interest of the game.

In addition, as for the small hits that can occur as a result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment, the number of times the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is opened is set to six times, which is one time (and) compared to other big hits. The total opening time is also set short. Specifically, the opening is performed 6 times for 0.3 seconds for a total of 1.8 seconds. Therefore, as compared with the big hit game (for example, the 15R first big hit game, the 4R fourth big hit game, etc.), the number of game balls that can be obtained in one small hit game is set to be smaller. However, in the high accuracy and low base state between big hits, by generating small hits a plurality of times (many times), it is possible to execute a plurality of small hit games and acquire more game balls. In addition, in all small hits, the second big winning opening 35 is opened, and the first big winning opening 30 is not opened. For this reason, the second large winning opening 35 is also referred to as a "small hit large winning opening (small hit variable entry opening)". In the small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of times the big winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of times it is opened. In addition, the probability variation function does not operate based on the occurrence of small hits, and if the gaming state at the time of small hits is a high probability state, it is considered to be a high probability state even after the small hits are completed, and when small hits occur. If the game state of is a low probability state, it is considered to be a low probability state even after the small hit game is completed. Similarly, the time saving function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not activated based on the occurrence of small hits.

The probability of distribution to each jackpot in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 20% for the 15R first jackpot, 10% for the 4R second jackpot, 35% for the 4R third jackpot, and the 4R first jackpot. The 4 jackpots are 35%. On the other hand, the jackpot in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 50% for the 15R 5th jackpot, 15% for the 2R 6th jackpot, and 35% for the 2R 7th jackpot. That is, if a big hit is obtained by the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the third starting port 26 (the second special symbol hit / fail judgment) in which the fluctuation frequency is improved by the operation of the second special symbol time saving function described later, 15R It becomes a big hit (15R 5th big hit), and a large amount of game balls can be acquired in a short period of time. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the hit / fail judgment (first special symbol hit / fail judgment) performed when the game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is a first hit rather than a big hit. 3 It is highly possible that a big hit is advantageous for the player (a large amount of game balls can be obtained) in the hit / fail judgment (second special symbol hit / fail judgment) performed when the game ball enters the starting port 26. It is set to be. Further, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the 15R fifth big hit and the occurrence of a high-accuracy low-base state in which the game ball can be increased by the small hit.

Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is performed based on a "special symbol hit / miss judgment random number (also referred to as" hit / miss judgment information ")", and when it becomes a big hit. The determination of the type of jackpot is performed based on the "random number for determining the jackpot type (also referred to as" random number for determining symbol "and" information for determining symbol ")". It should be noted that the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit. As shown in FIG. 7A, the random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random numbers (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, or the third starting port 26 include a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not and a random number for determining the jackpot type. In addition, there is a "variable pattern random number (also referred to as" variable pattern information ")". Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation mode) including the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage of the gate 28 include the normal symbol hit / miss determination random numbers shown in FIG. 7 (B). The normal symbol hit / miss determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol hit / miss determination). Ordinary symbol random numbers take a value in the range of 0 to 240.

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, each function of the probability variation function (probability variation function) for the special symbol and the normal symbol, the variation time shortening function for the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and the opening extension function of the second starting port 21 is in the operating state or not. It has a plurality of gaming states depending on the combination of operating states. For special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the probability fluctuation function is activated is referred to as a "high probability state", and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not activated is referred to as a "low probability state". In the high probability state (big hit probability: 1/63), the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the low probability state (big hit probability: 1/315). That is, in the low-probability state, the hit / fail judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table for the low-probability state, but in the high-probability state, the jackpot judgment for the high-probability state in which the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number determined to be a jackpot is large A hit / fail judgment is made using the table (see FIG. 8 (A)). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit (the stop symbol will be the jackpot symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. The means (main control unit) for setting a high probability or a low probability as the probability of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (big hit probability) is called a "probability setting means".

Further, for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is operating is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the special symbol is not operating is referred to as a "non-time saving state". In the time saving state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the confirmation display time) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table defined so that the fluctuation pattern having the short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and effective ball entry into the starting port (ball entry that can be stored as special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the length of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantages and disadvantages of the player, it is set as the "second special symbol time saving function" as shown in FIG. There is. A state A (low accuracy low base state) and a state B (low accuracy high base state) shown in FIG. 9 as a state in which the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, that is, a state mainly in determining whether the first special symbol is correct or not. , High accuracy and high base state). In the state A (low probability low base state), when the player plays a right-handed game and puts the game ball into the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed and the second special symbol is executed. Is displayed in a variable manner. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the state A is set to a very long time (600 seconds off, 110 seconds for the big hit, 1000 seconds for the small hit), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such a state). Is also referred to as "first condition state"). Since the base is low (first game state), it is impossible or difficult to enter the second starting port 21.

Therefore, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large amount of game balls even if the right-handed game is performed in the state A. Therefore, in the state A, the game is advanced in the left-handed game aiming at the first starting port 20 in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of simultaneously (parallel) executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. Even if the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in the variable state in the state A, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variable display of the second special symbol to end. , The first special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner.

On the other hand, in the state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), since the high base state (second game state) and the first special symbol time saving function is operating, the right-handed game is performed. As a result, it is possible to enter both the second starting port 21 and the third starting port 26, which are in the open state. In the state B, as in the state A, the second special symbol time saving function is not activated. Therefore, when the ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but the variable time of the second special symbol is a very long time. Since it is set to (600 seconds off, 110 seconds for big hit, 1000 seconds for small hit), the game cannot proceed smoothly. However, when the ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol hit / miss determination is executed and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, by operating the first special symbol time saving function, the first special symbol time saving state is set, and the first special symbol winning / failing determination is executed more frequently than the state A, and the game can proceed smoothly.

In addition, it has a state C (high accuracy and low base state) shown in FIG. 9 as a state mainly for determining whether or not the second special symbol is correct. In state C (high accuracy and low base state), since the second special symbol time saving function is activated, it is possible to play a game aiming at entering the third starting port 26 by performing a right-handed game. It becomes. When the ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / fail determination is executed, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the second special symbol time saving function is activated to set the second special symbol time saving state, and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed more frequently than the states A and B, and the game proceeds smoothly. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to execute the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol hit / miss judgment.

In the state C, when the ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the first special symbol hit / miss judgment is executed and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but the first special symbol is displayed. Since the fluctuation time of the symbol is set to a very long time (600 seconds off, 110 seconds for big hit), the game cannot proceed smoothly. Therefore, in the state C, even if the ball is entered into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, or if there is a hold memory related to the first special symbol winning / failing determination, the second special symbol winning / failing determination is performed. It is possible to reduce as much as possible the possibility that the disadvantageous first special symbol winning / failing determination is executed.

As described above, although the state B and the state C are both states in which the right-handed game is performed, in the state B, as in the state C, the game state is set in which the first special symbol winning / failing determination is mainly performed, and the state C is performed. Then, it is regarded as a game state in which the second special symbol winning / failing judgment is mainly performed. As a result, it becomes a big hit in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) in which the left-handed game is performed, and in the so-called consecutive villa period (right-handed state) after shifting to the right-handed game, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made. The game is diversified by shifting between the game state in which the game is mainly performed and the game state in which the second special symbol winning / failing judgment is mainly performed. In addition, since the game state in which the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is mainly performed and the game state in which the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is mainly performed have different types of jackpots (big hit games) that can occur, right-handed strikes. During the continuation of the game, different big hits (big hit games) are generated by the transition of these game states. This makes it possible to prevent the game from getting bored and enhance the game's interest.

Further, when the second special symbol time saving function is activated, that is, in the state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as a "second condition state"), as shown in FIG. 9, the second Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, the player can play the right-handed game smoothly without reducing the number of balls held compared to the left-handed game (second special symbol hit / fail judgment, first). 2 It becomes possible to execute a special symbol variable game). Further, in this embodiment, the first special symbol time saving function is not activated during the period when the second special symbol time saving function is operating (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is made longer than the normal state). However, the first special symbol time saving function may be activated. Further, in the state B, the holding ball is maintained or slightly decreased, and in the state C, it is increased.

The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function (first special symbol time reduction function or second special symbol time reduction function) for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) operate at the same time. Then, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol operate in synchronization with the high base generation function. That is, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) and the low base state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy). It does not work in the low base state). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the low base state (also referred to as "general figure high probability state"). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (win random number) determined to be a hit is larger than that of the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A and C) for the state B. Using the normal symbol hit determination table, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment (judgment of the normal symbol) is performed (see FIG. 8C). That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stop symbol will be a normal hit symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. ..

Further, in the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but is 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8 (E)). Further, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is operating. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the low base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs an opening operation of 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds) to open. The second starting port is opened during the operation period. Further, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the high base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 is assumed to perform the opening operation of 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). .. Further, the closing time between the opening operations in the low base state is set to 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of opening operations of the opening / closing member 37 is different between the low base state and the high base state, but the number of opening operations may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be set to open once for 2.7 seconds, or the opening operation in the high base state may be set to open three times for 2.0 seconds. Further, the opening operation in the high base state may be set to 6 times of 1.0 seconds, which may be larger than the number of times of opening in the low base state. Such a case is also referred to as an operation of increasing the number of times the variable winning device 22 is opened.

In the high base state, the probability fluctuation function for the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, as compared with the low base state in which these functions are not activated. , The period during which the second starting port 21 is open becomes longer (the opening time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 becomes higher (also referred to as "high frequency state"). ). As a result, the execution frequency of the first special symbol winning / failing determination becomes high. As described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls on hand.

Further, if the opening time is the same, the smaller the number of opening times, the less likely the game ball will pass through the second starting port 21. In this embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to open once for 6.0 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Since the second starting port 21 is in the closed state during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the game ball starts to flow down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state during the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. The time is set so that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 opens before passing through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is in the open state while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the open state. Further, in order to prevent the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing over the upper surface of the movable member 23, the material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is used for the game on the front side thereof. The material has a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the material is different).

As a result, the speed at which the game ball flows down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to a speed slower than the game torrent or speed of the game ball passage on the front side thereof. Further, as a mode for reducing the flow-down speed, the inclination angle may be loosened, or an inhibitory member (projection or the like) for reducing the flow-down speed may be provided. Further, as a result, in the high base state, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 does not enter the second starting port 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning opening. The possibility of flowing down to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if a small hit occurs and the second large winning opening 35 is opened (the ball can be entered), the game ball that has flowed down enters the second starting opening 21 and is second. It is difficult to enter the big winning opening 35. Further, the third out opening 34c can also prevent the game ball that has flowed down to the side of the second special winning opening 35 from entering the second large winning opening 35.

The high base state does not have to activate all of the above functions. That is, by operating at least one of the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol, the second starting port is more than when the function is not operating. It suffices if 21 is easily opened (the frequency of ball entry is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state is called a "high base generation function".

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol. There is a possibility of trying to display the second special symbol in a variable manner without displaying it in a variable manner. That is, there is a possibility of trying to perform a right-handed game even in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state). However, as described above, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is extremely long compared to the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol. Because it is set to, even if the 2nd special symbol is variablely displayed in the normal state (even if the ball is entered into the 3rd starting port 26), it is not possible to be variablely displayed many times, and the game efficiency is very high. It's a bad thing. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to display the first special symbol in a variable manner by the left-handed game than to display the second special symbol in a variable manner by the right-handed game. Here, "a state in which the first special symbol is not in the game (non-gaming state)" means that the first special symbol is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved first special symbols is "0". It means that it is. In addition, "a state in which the second special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)" means that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved second special symbols is "0". It means that.

Further, in a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, the frequency with which the second starting port 21 is opened is improved, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is increased by the first special symbol time saving function. Is shortened, and the efficiency of the right-handed game is improved. In such a case, it is more advantageous to perform the right-handed game to determine whether or not the first special symbol is correct than to perform the left-handed game. Further, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the second starting port 21 than to enter the ball into the first starting port 20. Because it is. Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28, which is a trigger for determining whether or not the symbol is correct, a right-handed hit is performed so that the game ball enters the second starting port 21.

Further, in the high accuracy and low base state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened by the second special symbol time saving function, and the game efficiency by the right-handed game is improved. In such a case, it is possible to proceed with the game more advantageously by performing the right-handed game and performing the second special symbol winning / failing determination which is advantageous for the player. Further, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 is the same as in the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state), and the ball is executed based on the entry into the second starting port 21. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol changes for a long time (compared to the low probability low base state). Further, in the high accuracy and low base state, the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol are not activated, so that the player enters the second starting port 21. The ball frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, a prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 cannot be obtained as much as in the high base state. However, instead, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment prevents the number of game balls from decreasing during the big hit due to the small hit (small hit probability: 420/630) that occurs with a high probability, and rather causes the small hit to occur frequently. It is also possible to increase the number of balls held by (generating multiple times).

That is, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), the ball enters the second starting port 21 by frequently causing the ball to enter the second starting port 21 by the right-handed game. Aim for the next big hit by the first special symbol hit / fail judgment without greatly reducing the number of balls held. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is set to one, and even if all the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting opening 21, the game is played. The sphere does not increase (maintain). Further, in this embodiment, since about 75 to 85% of the right-handed game balls are set to enter the second starting port 21, the base is high unless the ball enters another entry port. If the state is continued for a long period of time, the number of balls held will decrease, albeit slightly. Further, by adjusting the game nails around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the ball entry rate of the game ball into the second start port 21.

On the other hand, in the high-accuracy low-base state, a small hit is generated at a high frequency (420/630) by the second special symbol hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 by the right-handed game, and the accuracy is high. While aiming to increase the number of balls held in the small hit game during the low base state, the next big hit is aimed at by the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol hit / miss judgment. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the longer the period in which the next big hit does not occur (the longer the period in the high-accuracy low-base state continues), the more small hits are generated. There are more opportunities (to perform a small hit game), which is advantageous to the player.

[Explanation of board configuration and game status]
Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), various entrances are provided from the upstream side of the game area to the gate 28 (start gate 29), the first large winning opening 30, and the first large winning opening. The two starting openings 21 and the second winning openings 35 are arranged in the optimum order. Further, since the game ball flow passage in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, when each of these winning openings is closed, about 90% of the game balls fired in the right game area 3B are , Passing through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first large winning opening 30, then flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 21, and then the second winning opening 35. It is configured to flow down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 and flow down to the out port 34. Then, if there is an open winning opening in the middle of the flow, the ball is entered into the winning opening, discharged from the winning opening to the back surface of the game board, and the entered game ball is placed in the game area downstream of the winning opening. It has a structure that does not exist. Further, the remaining 10% that does not flow into the gate 28 enters the second out port 34b provided on the upstream side of the gate 28 and is discharged to the outside of the game machine. Further, by adjusting the angle of the game nail around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the inflow ratio of the game ball to the gate 28 side.

By arranging the gate 28 in the uppermost stream, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is hindered from reaching the gate 28 by the opened second starting port 21 or the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent as much as possible that the normal symbol hold becomes "0" and a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbol does not change) occurs. That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the uppermost stream of the right game area, almost all the game balls hit right can be passed through the gate 28 regardless of whether or not the other winning openings are opened. Further, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows down the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not hinder the ball from entering another winning opening.

When a right-handed game is performed in a high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), it is first determined whether or not the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened. Will be done. In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is also set to a high probability (239/240), so that the game ball is gated. Immediately after passing through (1 second later), the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 is opened. That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol hit / fail determination is executed and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second starting port 21. 2 The starting port 21 is in the open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also set to be one time of 6.0 seconds, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second as long as the right-handed game is continued. After that, the cycle of opening once for 6.0 seconds, closing during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, and then opening once for 6.0 seconds is repeated (1 second closing → 6). Open for 0.0 seconds → Close for 1 second → Open for about 6.0 seconds → ...).

Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is almost opened, and most of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B (about 70 to 80%) are in the second starting port 21. It will enter the ball. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol hit / miss determination is executed. In the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, in the high accuracy and high base state, there is a 1/63 probability that a big hit will occur, a small hit will not occur, and a 62/63 probability will result in a loss.

First, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is wrong, most of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B (about 70 to 80%) are in the open state after passing through the gate 28. The ball enters the second starting port 21 and other game balls flow downstream from the game ball passage branching in front of the second starting port 21 and flow down to the third starting port 21 without flowing down to the second starting port 21. Enter the ball at 26 or flow into the out port 34. As a result, the first special symbol hit / miss determination is continuously (highly frequently) executed. In addition, since one prize ball is ejected by entering one ball into the second starting port 21, the decrease speed of the ball held is reduced, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed, and the next big hit is made. It becomes possible to aim. In addition, one prize ball is also ejected by entering one ball into the third starting port 26.

Next, when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is a big hit, the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 is opened in a mode corresponding to the big hit type shown in FIG. .. Further, the second big winning opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the big hit game. As a result, when the big hit game is started, the game ball that flows down by the game to the right is smoothly entered by the first big winning opening without being hindered by other winning openings such as the second starting opening 21. Enter 30. Here, when the second starting port 21 is arranged upstream from the first big winning opening 30, the second starting port 21 shifts to the low base state during the big hit game, but in this embodiment, the second starting port 21 is in the low base state. Since the specifications are such that the ball can be opened, the game ball that flows down the right game area during the big hit game enters the second start port 21 first, and does not enter the second start port 21. Only the second big winning opening 30 will enter the ball.

Moreover, since the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is one, the execution time of the jackpot game is only extended for a long time, and the player has no merit. Rather, there is a risk that the game will be redundant, will not proceed smoothly, and will reduce the interest of the game. Therefore, by arranging the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 as in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation and smoothly proceed with the big hit game. Become. Since the first big winning opening 30 is not opened except during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 30 may prevent the ball from entering the second starting opening 21 when not during the big hit game. Absent.

Next, the high-accuracy low-base state will be described. The high-accuracy low-base state is a low-base state, but since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting right. When a right-handed game is performed in a high-accuracy and low-base state, a determination as to whether or not the game ball first passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened (normal symbol hit / fail determination) is executed. In the low base state (high accuracy low base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a longer time (3 seconds) than in the high base state, and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is also lower than that in the high base state. Since it is set to (1/240), a little time after the game ball passes through the gate (3 seconds later), if it hits, the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 opens. It becomes a state. Since the probability of hitting is set to 1/240, it is almost possible that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state. In addition, instead of such an aspect, the probability of winning in the normal symbol hit / fail judgment in the low base state may be set to 0/240, and all the results may be out of order. In this way, the second starting port 21 will not be opened in the low base state. Similarly, the hit probability in the high base state is 239/240.

That is, in the high accuracy and low base state, the probability that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state is set to be very low, so that the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 is set to the second starting port 21. The probability of entering the ball is low, and the possibility of reaching the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 through the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set high. The possibility that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment will be a small hit varies depending on whether it is in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) or in the high accuracy low base state. Absent. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small hit probability: 420/630). Further, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit, and only the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination has a small hit.

The game ball that flows down through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 and downstream of the first winning opening 30 is branched into a third starting port 26 side passage and a second starting port 21 side passage by a branching portion. When the game ball that has flowed into the passage on the side of the third starting port 26 enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / miss determination is executed. Further, in the high accuracy and low base state, it is unlikely that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state even if the game ball passes through the gate 28, so that the game ball flowing into the passage on the second starting port 21 side is almost the same. All of them flow down to the second big winning opening 35 and the third out opening 34c provided downstream of the second starting opening 21 without entering the second starting opening 21.

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination executed based on entering the third starting port 26 is a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened. , It is opened in the opening / closing mode for small hits shown in FIG. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds, and the total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game ball that has flowed into the passage on the side of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the closed second starting port 21 and flows down to the second big winning opening 35, and is opened by the small hit game. Enter the second big winning opening 35 which is.

Since the prize balls based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each entry, the balls are entered into the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls held during the high accuracy and low base state. In addition, since the high-accuracy low-base state continues at least until the next big hit occurs due to the special symbol hit / fail judgment, the player can increase the number of balls held as the high-accuracy low-base state continues for a long period of time. It will be possible. In the high accuracy and high base state, the second special symbol time is shortened and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (the first special symbol long time state). The execution frequency of is higher than the execution frequency of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment. In this embodiment, it is possible to obtain about 20 prize balls (two balls) on average by generating one small hit game. By generating this small hit game a plurality of times (many times) until the next big hit occurs, it is possible to increase a large number of game balls (for example, 200 balls in 10 times). Further, as a result, as the total winning balls in the "renso period" in which the right-handed game is continued, the winning balls of the small hit game can be added in addition to the winning balls of the big hit game, and a larger number of game balls can be obtained. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30 for big hits (for big hits only), and the second big winning opening 35 arranged downstream from the second starting opening 21 (the most downstream of these) are for small hits (for small hits). It is said to be a big prize opening (only for small hits). Further, by arranging the second big winning opening 35, which is a big winning opening for small hits, downstream from the second starting opening 21, the opening operation (opening / closing control) of the second starting opening 21 causes the second big winning opening. The number (ratio) of game balls reaching the winning opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed by the opening / closing control of the second starting port 21 (time of opening, fluctuation time of normal symbol, winning probability of normal symbol winning / failing determination), a high base state ( The high-probability low-base state is more likely than the low-probability high-base state and the high-probability high-base state) to allow the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 35. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second big winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting opening 21 (without entering the ball), the first step is made. 2 The effect of opening / closing control of the starting port 21 is made more effective.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the low accuracy and high base state where the small hit game can occur, the second starting port 21 is configured so as not to be in the open state at all (may be a configuration in which the small hit is not opened at all). It is difficult to adjust the ball entry rate to the second large winning opening 35 when the game occurs by entering the ball into the second starting opening 21. Therefore, a third out opening 34c is provided between the second starting opening 21 and the second big winning opening 35, and the ball entry rate to the third out opening 34c can be adjusted to make the second big winning. The ball entry rate to the mouth 35 can be adjusted.

Further, even in the same right-handed game, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21 to almost maintain the holding ball (including a slight increase or a slight decrease) (or the speed of the holding ball decrease is suppressed). (While), a state in which the game is played with the expectation that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment will be a big hit (advantageous big hit) (high base state), and a small ball is inserted into the third starting port 26. A state in which the player plays with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment will be a big hit (advantageous big hit) while increasing the number of balls held by entering the second big winning opening 35 when a hit occurs (high accuracy and low). (Base state), and has diversified playability. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game. For the player, the high-accuracy low-base state in which the number of balls held can be increased is more advantageous than the high-base state. In addition, while continuing the right-handed game, it is possible to shift between a high base state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) and a high accuracy low base state. Diversify and enhance the entertainment of the game.

Further, the start gate 29 is provided at the uppermost stream in the right game area 3B by also being used as the gate 28. As a result, when the jackpot standby state is reached, the game ball is passed through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing without being hindered by the second start port 21 or the like, and the jackpot game is started. It becomes possible to do. The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In that case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28, but the first large winning opening 30 and the first gate 28 may be provided. It is necessary to provide the 2 starting port 21, the 3rd starting port 26, and the 2nd big winning opening 35 upstream.

Further, when the right-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit and controlled in a predetermined manner to notify that the right-handed game should be fired. Further, when the left-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (display controlled) in a predetermined mode to notify that the left-handed game should be fired. Specifically, the launch direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz", and indicates the launch direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the left game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as "y □ z □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y ■ z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming states when the variation display of the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) is performed are "low accuracy low base state", "high accuracy low base state", and "high accuracy low base state". It is possible to control either "low accuracy high base state" or "high accuracy high base state", but among them, the low accuracy low base state is also called "normal gaming state", and the high accuracy low base state is called. Also called "specific game state".

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation (control processing by the main control unit) of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 46. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. .. As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, the initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial settings, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, statuses, and counters. Reset etc. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". In addition, the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that. In the examples and drawings, the normal symbol is "general symbol", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "special symbol 1" or "first special symbol", and the second special symbol is "special symbol". It may be called "2" or "second special drawing".

Following the initial setting (S101), the interrupt is disabled (S102), and the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, the interrupt is enabled (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, between the end of the interrupt process (S105) and the start of the next interrupt process (S105), the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Will be executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt processing (S105), the output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. To do. Examples of the command and the like output here include information on the game state, the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, the symbol as the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper 1 byte is information about the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information about the content of the command.

In the input process (S202) performed after the output process (S201), various sensors (first start port sensor 20a, second start port sensor 21a, third start port sensor 26a) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. , The first large winning opening sensor 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the general entry opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5)) reads the detection signal and stores it in the output buffer of the RAM as the winning ball information. Further, the detection signal from the lower plate full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball tray 62 (also referred to as “lower plate”) is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as the lower plate full data.

Next, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is executed. The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is the same process as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is performed after the execution period of the timer interrupt processing (S105) and the other periods (after the end of the interrupt processing (S105)). It is performed both in the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started). As a result, the acquired values of various random numbers are given randomness.

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), the start port sensor detection process (S204), start ball entry process (S205), normal figure operation process (S206), and special figure 1 operation process (S207), which will be described later. ), Special figure 2 operation process (S208), hold ball number process (S209), and power failure monitoring process (S210) are executed. After that, various other processes (S211) are executed to end the interrupt process (S105). Then, until the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the main control main processes S102 to S104 are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
Next, the start port sensor detection process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal symbol hold balls (the number of normal symbol hold, specifically, the number of normal symbol hold provided in the RAM) is counted by the counter. It is determined whether or not the value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 in S301 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

If it is determined in S302 that the number of normally symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the stored normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. Do and proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7 (B)) of the random number counter for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not, which is stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, is acquired. Then, the acquired random number values (acquisition information, normal figure acquisition information) are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol hold balls in the normal figure hold storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a or the second start port sensor 21a. Judgment (S305). If it is determined in S305 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, when it is determined in S305 that a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of first special figure reserved, specifically (S306), it is determined whether or not the number (the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of first special figure reservations) provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number). Then, when it is determined in S306 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. When it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the stored number of special figure 1 reserved balls (S307), and a random number related to special figure 1 is acquired. Process (S308) and proceed to S309.

In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, and the random number for determining the jackpot type, which are stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. The counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (random number values shown in FIG. 7 (A)), and the acquired random number values (acquisition information, special feature) are acquired. The figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in the first special figure hold storage unit 85a.

In S309, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the third start port 26, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the third start port sensor 26a (S309). When it is determined in S309 that the game ball has not entered the third starting port 26 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S309 that a game ball has entered the third starting port 26 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, specifically, the main control). It is determined whether or not the number (the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the second special figure hold) provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number) (S310). Then, when it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached four (YES in S310), the process ends. When it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the stored number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 (S311), and it is related to Special Figure 2. Random number acquisition processing is performed (S312), and the processing is completed.

In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), the value of the special symbol hit / miss determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is the same as in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308). (Label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (shown in FIG. 7A). Random number value), and those acquired random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the second special figure 2 in the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

[Processing at the time of starting ball entry]
Next, the process at the time of starting and entering the ball (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs the start ball entry process (S205) after the start port sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the start ball entry process (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by “1” (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 in S307 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start port. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure hold storage unit is read (acquired information). S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, among the acquired random number values read out, the value of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not) is a big hit according to the current game state (low probability state or high probability state). It is determined whether or not it is out of order (preliminary determination), and if the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of the big hit is further determined (preliminary determination). The determination (pre-judgment) by S317 is a pre-judgment (so-called "hold look-ahead") in which the hit / fail judgment (judgment of whether or not it is a big hit) for the special figure 2 hold is performed prior to the hit / fail judgment in the special figure 2 hit / fail judgment process described later. ").

The pre-judgment as to whether or not it is a big hit can be made in the big hit judgment table (see FIG. 8A), that is, in the high probability state, the big hit judgment table for the high probability state, or the normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the value matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state. Further, as another pre-judgment mode, as a fluctuation pattern information judgment table capable of judging fluctuation pattern information, a fluctuation pattern information judgment table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a fluctuation pattern information judgment table for a high probability state (for a high probability state) It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern information determination table of the above is provided. Then, in the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the acquired random number value (value of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state. It is possible to do. Then, from the selected fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not the game is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and whether or not a game effect with high reliability of the big hit is executed.

Next, in S318, game information (preliminary judgment information) related to the result of the judgment by S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches the jackpot judgment value (big hit information), Information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random value for determining the jackpot type) (big hit type information), information indicating whether or not the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches the small hit determination value (small hit information) ), Command data including information indicating the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) is generated as a special figure 2 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). As the special figure 2 start entry command, a part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read by S316 may be transmitted to the sub-control board as it is, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted as it is. Is not transmitted as it is, but the game information acquired based on the value of the random number acquired in Special Figure 2 (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information) may be transmitted.

Further, by analyzing the special figure 2 start-in ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub control unit 90, it is possible to determine whether the information is related to a big hit, what kind of big hit is, and the information related to a small hit. The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is. Further, in this embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entry command, whether or not the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when it is judged in a high probability state, and low. It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when it is judged in the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start entry command as a hold (effect hold information), predetermines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not the command is successful in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect hold information determined to be a big hit is stored in.

From the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not among the random number values read by S316 is not transmitted to the sub-control unit as it is, and the value of the other random number counter for determining the jackpot type (big hit). Command data including information indicating the value of the random number value for determining the type) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) and the information indicating the result of the pre-judgment are generated as the special figure 2 start entry command, and this is generated. Can be set.

Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" in the same manner as in the above-described processing according to Special Figure 2 (S319). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first start port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends as it is. The processing of S321 to S323 is the same processing as that of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure hold storage unit is read (S321). Pre-determination is performed on the read acquired random number value (S322). Then, the command data including the game information related to this pre-determination is generated as the special figure 1 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). The preliminary determination (holding look-ahead) of S322 is performed prior to the accuracy determination in the special figure 1 accuracy determination process described later.

[Public map operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal drawing operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 after the start ball entry process (S205). In the normal figure operation process (S206), the process related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. .. Then, when the "normal figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "2" (S401). NO, YES for S403), normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404), and if the "normal symbol operation status" is "3" (NO for both S401 and S403, YES for S405), the normal symbol is confirmed. The process (S406) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "4" (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), the normal electric accessory process (S407) is performed. The normal figure operation status is "1" by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is "0" in S501 (YES in S501), the process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in S501 that it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol hit / fail determination process described later is performed (S502), and then the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D), if the game state is the high base state (state B), the normal symbol variation time is 1 second. Select a symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a low base state (states A and C), a normal symbol variation pattern with a normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Further, after the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504) described later is performed, then the normal symbol variation start process (S505) is performed, and the process is completed. In the normal symbol fluctuation start processing (S505), the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started with the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Further, in the normal symbol change start process, a normal symbol change start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of change of the normal symbol.

[Normal symbol hit / miss judgment process]
Next, the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit / miss determination random number counter stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit is read out (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) (S602). When it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, it is in a high base state (YES in S602), the table for state B (hit determination) among the normal symbol hit determination tables shown in FIG. 8 (C). Based on the high-probability normal figure hit / fail judgment based on the values (0) to “238”), it is judged whether or not it is a hit (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-H) of the read random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct matches any of the hit determination values.

On the other hand, in S602, when the state B flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the base state is low (NO in S602), the state A (state C) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C). Based on the table (hit judgment value is "0" to "119"), it is determined whether or not the hit is a hit by the low-probability normal figure hit / miss judgment (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure hit / fail judgment (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605), and if it is judged to be a miss (NO in S605), the stop display is missed. Determine the normal symbol (the symbol that is out of the ordinary) (S606), and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal figure) in S605 (YES in S605), the normal symbol per stop display (design per normal figure) is determined (S607), and the normal figure hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), Finish the process.

[Normal symbol random number shift processing]
Next, the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each Fuzu hold in the Fuzu hold storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-level hold storage in the normal figure hold storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth hold of the normal figure is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish the process. In this way, the general map hold is digested in the order of hold.

[Processing during normal symbol change]
Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and when it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S801), the processing is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passage has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803), and then the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed. Other processing such as stopping at the display result (hit normal symbol or off normal symbol) according to the judgment result of the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not is performed (S804), and the process is completed.

[Normal symbol confirmation process]
Next, the ordinary symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). When it is determined that the normal figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high base state (S902). When it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), the opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), shift to S904. The opening pattern for the state B (for the high base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 1.8 seconds is repeated three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set in the second starting port opening counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the open pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) is open for states A and C (for low base state). Set the pattern (S906) and move to S904. The opening pattern for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 0.9 seconds is performed three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set in the second start port opening counter. In S904, the normal figure operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is completed.

[Ordinary electric accessory processing]
Next, the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal figure is ON (S1001). The normal figure hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has been completed in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. When it is determined that the end flag per normal figure is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). When it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port is not open (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second starting port 21 (S1003), and the opening time has not been reached. If it is determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second starting port (YES in S1003), the control for opening the second starting port is executed (S1004), and the process ends. If S1002 determines that the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is time to close the second starting port 21 (that is, after opening the second starting port 21 in advance. If it is determined (whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed) (S1005) and it is determined that it is not the closing time of the second starting port (NO in S1005), the process is terminated. When it is determined by S1005 that it is the closing time of the second starting port (YES in S1005), the process of closing (closing) the second starting port 21 is performed (S1006), and the value of the second starting port opening counter is performed. Is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second start port opening counter is "0" (S1008). When it is determined in S1008 that the value of the opening counter is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is terminated as it is in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the open counter is "0" (YES in S1008), the end processing for each normal figure to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the end flag for normal figure is set (S1009). S1010), finish the process. The second start port opening counter becomes "0" when the second start port 21 is opened three times (opening operation of the movable member 23) in the state B (high base state), and the state A. And even in the state C (low base state), it becomes "0" when the second starting port 21 is opened three times. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1001 that the end flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has been completed. , Turn off the normal figure hit end flag (S1011), turn off the normal figure hit flag (S1012), set the normal figure operation status to "1" (S1013), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special Figure 1 Operation Processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 operation process (S207) after the normal figure operation process (S206). This special figure 1 operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big prize device (first big prize device 31 and second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. Then, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2". (NO for S1101, YES for S1103), special symbol 1 variable processing (S1104) is performed, and if "Special symbol 1 operation status" is "3" (NO for both S1101 and S1103, YES for S1105) ), Perform special symbol 1 confirmation processing (S1106), and if "Special symbol 1 operation status" is "4" (NO for S1101, S1103, S1105, YES for S1107), special electric as a big hit game The accessory process 1 (S1108) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5" (all of S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are NO), the process is completed. The operation status of Special Figure 1 is "1" by default. Further, since the small hit is not set as the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, the special electric accessory process 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small hit is set as the result of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment. You may. In this case, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5", the special electric accessory process 2 as a small hit game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 standby processing]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 1) is "0" (S1201). When it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0", that is, there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 (YES in S1201), then , It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is in the game (S1207). Then, when it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is in the game (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is not in the game (NO in S1207), the process of setting the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the standby screen (during the execution of the demo screen for waiting for customers). If it is determined whether or not (S1208) and it is determined that the standby screen is in progress (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not in progress (NO in S1208), the standby screen setting process for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the process ends.

Further, in S1201, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not "0", that is, one or more random number counter values acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 are stored (in S1201). NO), the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1204), the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) are performed in this order. Here, "special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not in the game" means that special figure 2 is not in variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0". Means that. Of course, it means that the big hit game and the small hit game according to the special figure 2 are not executed either.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
Next, the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203) will be described with reference to FIG. 23. In the special figure 1 hit / miss determination process (S1203), first, as a determination value, the determination value is stored in the lowest region of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation). The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct (in the oldest memory) is read (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (S1602). When it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when one special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol does not determine whether it is a big hit, but a small hit or a small hit. It is considered to be one of the deviations (that is, it is not judged as a big hit). Since there is no small hit as a result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, when the second special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment executed during that period is All will be off. When it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol is not executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (NO in S1602), then whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, Determine if it is in a high probability state (S1603). When it is determined in S1603 that the probability variation flag is not ON, that is, it is in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the jackpot determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) The hit / fail judgment is made based on the table (big hit judgment values are "3" and "397") (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S1603), the hit / fail determination is performed based on the jackpot determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for high probability states, the jackpot determination values are "3", "5", "7", "311", "313", "317", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

In S1606, it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is "big hit" (S1606), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (YES in S1606), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-). AS) is read out, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8 (B) (S1608), and the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1609). Fig. 1 Turn on the jackpot fluctuation flag (S1610) and finish the process. In the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is judged using the jackpot type judgment table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol, it is for the second special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table of. Further, when it is determined as a big hit in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1), one of the 15R first big hit, the 4R second big hit, the 4R third big hit, and the 4R fourth big hit is executed. .. If the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is determined to be a big hit, either the 15R 5th big hit, the 2R 6th big hit, or the 2R 7th big hit is executed (Fig. 8 (B)). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is not "big hit" (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, the off-design is determined (S1607), and the processing is completed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot fluctuation flag, the first jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the first special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) is being executed. And a second jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), and the main control unit 80 The flag corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM of is set. Further, as the small hit fluctuation flag, a second small hit fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the small hit (variation display in which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is displayed. A flag corresponding to the small hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. Then, when the jackpot fluctuation flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the fluctuation display related to the jackpot is being displayed), in the other special symbol hit / fail determination, a process of determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed. Not performed. That is, control is not performed so that both special symbols execute the variable display related to the jackpot in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large amount of game profit is given to the player in a very short time, and to appropriately suppress gambling.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204) after the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the state A (whether or not it is the low probability low base state) (S1701). Then, when it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1702), and the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON. When it is determined (YES in S1702), the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is referred to in the state A jackpot table (the portion corresponding to the status A and the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Select a variation pattern based on (S1703). If the fluctuation pattern is decided, the fluctuation time is also decided. Further, in the first embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of fluctuation time is selected depending on the state A jackpot table.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) is either 1 or 2 (S1705). When it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first hold number out table (state A and out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 and the number of holds The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the parts corresponding to 1 and 2). In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P4 to P7 are selected.

Further, when it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of holds is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second hold number removal table (FIG. The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the variation pattern table shown in 9 (the portion corresponding to the state A and the number of pending numbers 3 and 4). As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "3" or "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "1" or "2". Fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected. In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works, and the average fluctuation time is shortened.

If it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not state A (low accuracy low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the gaming state is state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state). Is determined (S1708). When it is determined in S1708 that the state is B (S1708), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1709), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1708). (YES in S1709), refer to the state B jackpot table (the part corresponding to state B and jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), and fluctuate based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). Select a pattern (S1710). In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P15 to P16 are selected. When it is determined in S1709 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), refer to the state B deviation table (the part corresponding to the state B and deviation in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711). In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P17 to P19 are selected.

Further, when it is determined in S1708 that the gaming state is not state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), that is, the gaming state is state C (high accuracy low base state) (NO in S1708). Then, when it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1712) and it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C jackpot fluctuation table (in FIG. 9). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state C and the portion corresponding to the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown (S1710). In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P23 is selected. When it is determined in S1712 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), refer to the state C deviation table (the part corresponding to the state C and deviation in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714). In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P24 is selected.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing is completed. In the other processing (S1704), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern designation command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 1 Random number shift processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. 26. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, when the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is one lower side (for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is composed of the address space corresponding to the addresses "0000" to "0003". , Address "0000" side) (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). Clear the area to 0 (S1803) and finish this process. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special symbol 1 processing during change]
Next, the special symbol 1 variable processing (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. 27. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104), first, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. Whether or not it is determined (S1901). When it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the processing is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the process shifts to S1903. In S1903, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process shifts to the processing of S1904.

Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1905). When it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B fluctuation counter) that counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the state B (high base state). Is subtracted by 1 (S1905), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). When it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned off (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is a low-accuracy high-base state, it shifts to a low-accuracy low-base state (normal state). In the high accuracy and high base state, "10000" is set in the state B counter, so that the value of the state B counter is substantially "0" even if the counter is subtracted for each fluctuation. Absent. That is, the high accuracy and high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and the variation display of the special symbol is stopped at the result according to the judgment result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment random number and the big hit type determination random number. (S1909) and finish the process.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) is performing the variable display when the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed during the variable display of the special figure 1. This is a process of temporarily suspending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 of the above and restarting the interrupted measurement when the big hit game or the small hit game is completed. As a result, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game related to one special symbol, the hit / fail determination process or the variation display related to the other special symbol is not executed.

The special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901), when it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), and then the special figure 1 is specified. FIG. 2 It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON, that is, whether or not the jackpot game according to Special FIG. 2 is being executed (S2902). When it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is being executed. It is determined whether or not it is (S2909). When it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is executed (NO in S2909), the process ends. Then, the variable display of the special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902), and when it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), special figure 1 Turn on the interruption flag (S2903), interrupt the measurement of the fluctuation time in Special Figure 1 (S2904), and finish the process. As a result, the variable display of the special figure 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

Further, in S2901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is already interrupted (YES in S2901), whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON. Is determined (S2905). When it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the jackpot game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). When it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or the small hit game related to the special figure 2 has ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned off. (S2907), special figure 1 The measurement of the fluctuation time is restarted (S2908), and the processing is completed. As a result, the suspended display of the fluctuation of the first special symbol (time measurement of the fluctuation time) can be resumed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the interruption flag, the special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as “first interruption flag”) indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and the second special symbol A flag having a special figure 2 interruption flag (also referred to as a “second interruption flag”) indicating that the fluctuation display is being interrupted, and corresponding to the interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Is set (memorized).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. 29. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the jackpot fluctuation display related to the first special symbol is being displayed is turned off (S2002), and the first Turn on the special figure 1 jackpot flag indicating the execution of the jackpot game related to the special symbol (S2003), and shift to the processing of S2004. As a result, in Special Figure 1, it can be shown that the variable display related to the big hit is finished (the big hit is confirmed) and the game shifts to the big hit game.

In S2004, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a 15R jackpot (S2004), and if it is determined that the jackpot is a 15R jackpot (YES in S2004), a round to be executed during the jackpot game (in the mode of opening once per round) Set "15" to the value of the round counter that counts the number of times (from opening to closing of the big winning opening in one round) (S2005), and set the big hit opening command to start the big hit game (S2006). ), Set the operation status of Special Figure 1 to "4" (S2007), and finish the process. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2004 that it is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S2004), the jackpot type is a 4R jackpot, so "4" is set in the value of the round counter (S2008), and the process proceeds to S2006. In addition, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can grasp that the variation display of the special symbol has ended. As a result, the jackpot standby state is set. In addition, when it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, that is, the fluctuation display is related to the deviation, so the special figure 1 operation status. Is set to "1" (S2009), and the process is completed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot flag, the special figure 1 jackpot flag indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination related to the first special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed (“1st jackpot”). (Also referred to as "flag") and the special figure 2 jackpot flag (also referred to as "second jackpot flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed. When the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag (also referred to as a "small hit flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination related to the second special symbol is a small hit and the small hit game related to the small hit is being executed. When the small hit game is executed, the small hit flag corresponding to the small hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

Here, the round display 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when the 4R second big hit is achieved, the display mode is such as "2R Δ4R ▲ 15R Δ" (for example, ▲: lighting, Δ: extinguishing). Next, the special figure 2 operation process (S211) and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 operation process (S211), the special figure 1 operation process shown in FIGS. Since the processing is performed in the same flow as S206), the description will be simplified below.

[Special figure 2 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 operation process (S208) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation process (S207) shown in FIG. 21. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation process (S208) after the special figure 1 operation process (S207). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can execute variable display in parallel by the special figure 1 operation process and the special figure 2 operation process. That is, the digestion of the 1st special symbol hold and the digestion of the 2nd special symbol hold ("Variation display of the 1st special symbol and the variation display of the 2nd special symbol", "1st special symbol hit / miss judgment and 2nd special symbol" It is said that the hit / fail judgment and ") can be executed in parallel. Further, in the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the second starting port (the second special symbol hit / miss judgment) is the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the first starting port (the first special symbol hit / miss). It is more likely to be a jackpot with a large profit (a large amount of profit that can be obtained) for the player than the judgment) (FIG. 8 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 30, similarly to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the large prize device (first large prize device 31 and second large prize device 36) is divided into five stages. It is divided and "Special Figure 2 Operation Status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. Then, when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1151), the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) is performed, and when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2". (NO for S1151, YES for S1153), perform special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154), and if "Special symbol 2 operation status" is "3" (NO for both S1151 and S1153, YES for S1155) ), Perform special symbol 2 confirmation processing (S1156), and if "Special symbol 2 operation status" is "4" (NO for S1151, S1153, S1155, YES for S1157), special electric as a big hit game If the character processing 1 (S1108) is performed and the "special figure 2 operation status" is "5" (all of S1151, S1153, S1155, and S1157 are NO), the special electric character processing as a small hit game is performed. 2 (S1109) is performed. The operation status of Special Figure 2 is "1" by default. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) which is not included in the special figure 1 operation process.

Here, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) is a process common to the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211), and the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) is Special figure 2 Only the operation process (S211) is processed. This is because the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment enables the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed in parallel, but the jackpot game and the first special symbol related to the first special symbol are executed. This is because it is impossible to execute (only one of them can be executed) in parallel with the big hit game related to the special symbol. In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit, but as another embodiment, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game related to the first special symbol and the small hit game related to the second special symbol cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
Since the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22, description thereof will be omitted.

[Special Figure 2 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
The special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. 23. However, since this process is related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowest area of the second special figure hold storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) is set. The stored random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is read out. Further, since the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination has a small hit, when it is determined that the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol winning / failing determination is made. Judge whether the result of is a small hit (S1305). When it is determined in S1305 that it is a small hit (YES in S1305), the small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is completed. Other processing is the same as that of the special figure 1 hit / fail judgment processing (S1203).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), processing (S1401 to S1420) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. 24 and 25. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since this process is related to the second special symbol, it is based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the column corresponding to the second special symbol in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. And select the fluctuation pattern. Further, since the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination has a small hit, when it is determined that the small hit variation flag is ON, the variation pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the game state.

Further, in the state C, the game is mainly performed by displaying the variation of the second special symbol (determination of whether or not the second special symbol is correct). Therefore, in the state C, there are more types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) of the second special symbol than fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol, and variation patterns of various times (which can execute various game effects) are selected. It is possible. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol is lowered. On the other hand, in the state A and the state B, the game is mainly performed by the variable display of the first special symbol (the first special symbol hit / miss determination). Therefore, in the states A and B, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (fluctuation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and various time (various game effects) can be produced. The variable pattern (which can be executed) can be selected. Therefore, in the states A and B, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is simplified (there are few types). Further, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is lowered.

Further, since the states A and B are game states in which the game is mainly performed by displaying the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the second special symbol is disabled and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set. It has been set for a long time. Specifically, when the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed in the states A and B, the variation display time of the second special symbol is set to 110 seconds when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. (P12 or P20). This is set to a fluctuation time shorter than the longest fluctuation time set as the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit in the state A. Further, in the state B, the fluctuation time is set to be shorter than the longest fluctuation time set as the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit.

In the states A and B, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is not the main hit / fail judgment, but if an excessively long fluctuation time is set, the player who made the hit / fail judgment himself / herself executes the jackpot game related to the jackpot. There is a possibility that the game will end. Therefore, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the fluctuation time (the longest one) set in the main first special symbol is not set unnecessarily for a long time. Set a shorter fluctuation time. As a result, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment is a big hit, the player is set a variable time in which the player can wait, and the player is inflicted with a disadvantage that he / she cannot obtain the profit from the big hit that he / she has earned. Absent. In addition, since it is unlikely that a big hit will occur and the profit that can be obtained is large, such control is used.

Further, in the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a small hit, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 1000 seconds (P13 or P21). This is set to a longer fluctuation time than the longest fluctuation time that can be set to the first special symbol that is the main body in the state A. Further, the fluctuation time is set to be longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be set to the first special symbol that is the main body in the state B. Of the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol that is not the subject in states A and B, the case where the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol is a small hit is set to a longer fluctuation display time than when it is a big hit or a miss. Set.

Since the states A and B are mainly based on the first special symbol winning / failing determination that does not have a small hit in the result of the winning / failing determination, it is not desirable that the small hits occur frequently due to the execution of the second special symbol winning / failing determination. In addition, if there is a situation in which small hits can occur frequently, a malicious player executes the second special symbol hit / fail judgment even though the game state is mainly based on the first special symbol hit / fail judgment. There is a risk that a small hit will result in a game profit. For example, in a game state in which a left-handed game should be performed, there is a risk that a game profit may be unreasonably obtained due to an inappropriate game, such as performing a right-handed game. In order to prevent such a situation, in the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment that is not the main body is a small hit, the fluctuation time is set to a long time (the longest time). It prevents small hits (small hit games) from occurring frequently. Further, since the game profit that can be obtained by one small hit game is not so large, it does not cause much damage to the player who generated the small hit.

Further, in the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination is wrong, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds (P14 or P22). This is set to a longer fluctuation time than the longest fluctuation time that can be set to the first special symbol that is the main body in the state A. Further, the fluctuation time is set to be longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be set to the first special symbol that is the main body in the state B. In addition, the variation display time of the second special symbol that is not the main body in the states A and B is shorter than when the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and longer than when it is a big hit. Set to. When the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is wrong, by setting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol to a long time, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is lowered, and the left-handed game should be performed. , Prevent the player from playing an inappropriate game such as playing a right-handed game. As another aspect, the jackpot and the miss may have the same fluctuation time (for example, both may be 110 seconds, and both may be 600 seconds).

In the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), after the variation pattern is selected, another process (S1404) is performed to finish this process. In the other processing (S1404), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern designation command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 2 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted to the lower side by one (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). Clear the area to 0 (S1503) and finish this process. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2", the special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. To do.

[Special symbol 2 processing during change]
The special symbol 2 changing process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 is processed (S1951 to S1959) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) shown in FIG. 27. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing]
The special figure 2 fluctuation interruption process (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 is performed (S2951 to S2959) in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) shown in FIG. 28. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 finalization process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 is performed (S2051 to S2067) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 finalization process (S1106) shown in FIG. 29. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special figure 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) includes a big hit type (round counter setting process) and a special symbol 2 small hit fluctuation flag. The processing when it is determined to be ON is different, as shown in FIG. 38.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. 39. In the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108), first, the jackpot game start process described later is executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to the process of S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2102), and when it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2102 that the jackpot start flag is ON (YES in S2102), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the jackpot start flag is a flag that is turned ON when the player fires the game ball into the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball through the start gate 29 in the jackpot standby state. .. After the special symbol is displayed as a fixed stop with the jackpot symbol and becomes a jackpot, the jackpot start flag is turned on by passing the game ball through the start gate, and the jackpot game proceeds (the round game starts). Here, when the game ball is not passed through the start gate 29 after the big hit, the game machine is maintained in the big hit standby state in which the big hit can be executed. During this time, the player can leave his seat and take a break such as a toilet, a drink, or a telephone. Then, after the break is completed, the game ball is launched at an arbitrary timing of the player, and the game ball is passed through the start gate 29, so that the big hit game can proceed. Further, the jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening of the jackpot winning device (first jackpot winning device 31) has been completed (the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game.

When it is determined in S2103 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is open (S2104), and it is determined that it is not open. If so (NO in S2104), is it the time to open the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) (round start time), that is, is it time to pass the start gate 29 and start the first round? Or, it is determined whether the time of the interval between rounds has elapsed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). If S2105 determines that it is not the start time of the round (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is time to start the round (YES in S2105), the round start command is set (S2106), the large winning opening processing is performed (S2107), and the processing is completed. As a result, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) according to the type of big hit.

If it is determined by S2104 that the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is open (YES in S2104), the maximum number of balls that can be entered into the large winning opening in that round is the specified maximum number of balls (this implementation). In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not it is time to close the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 30), that is, the large winning opening It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening time (S2112). If it is determined by S2112 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the specified number of balls (10) has been reached (YES in S2111), or when it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2112). That is, when it is determined that any of the two round end conditions is satisfied, the large winning opening (first large winning opening 30) is closed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). When it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends in order to start the next round.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2115), the jackpot ending command is set (S2116) as the jackpot end process to end the jackpot game, and the jackpot ending period. (S2117), turn on the jackpot end flag (S2118), and finish the process. Further, when it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2103), since the final round has ended, it is then determined whether or not the jackpot ending period has passed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has passed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2120), the game state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the jackpot flag is turned off (S2122). , The jackpot start flag is turned off (S2123), the special figure operation status setting process 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the process is completed.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. 40. In the jackpot game start process (S2101), it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 has not yet passed in the jackpot standby state. If (NO in S2151), then it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON (S2152), and if it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probability change flag is set to OFF (S2102), and S2154 Move to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103), and when it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104) and the process proceeds to S2156. .. That is, during the execution of the big hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned off before the start of the big hit game (round game) in order to control the low probability state and the low base state.

If it is determined in S2152 that the probability change flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning off the probability change flag. If it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning off the state B flag. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the start gate (S2156), and if it is determined that the game ball has passed the start gate (YES in S2156), the jackpot game is started (the round game is opened). Turn on the jackpot start flag (S2157) and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the gate has not passed the start gate (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the game machine continues in the jackpot standby state. Further, when it is determined in S2151 that the jackpot start flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot game has already started (S2151), the process ends. As a result, the player can start (advance) the big hit game at an arbitrary timing.

[Game status setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game completed this time is related to the probability variation jackpot (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, five types of 15R first jackpot, 4R second jackpot, 4R third jackpot, 15R fifth jackpot, and 2R sixth jackpot are set as probabilistic jackpots, and in S2201, the jackpot games are these. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to any of the five types. Then, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot has ended this time (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2202), and then the completed jackpot game is either the 4R 3rd jackpot or the 2R 6th jackpot. Determine if it exists (S2203).

When it is determined in S2203 that the completed jackpot game is either the 4R 3rd jackpot or the 2R 6th jackpot (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and "10000" is set in the state B counter. Set (S2205) and finish the process. As a result, a high base state of up to 10,000 times is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the high accuracy high base state is obtained. It is not possible to execute the variable display of the special symbol 10,000 times during the business hours of the game store, so by setting "10000" to the status B counter, the next big hit will actually occur. It means that the high base state (state B) is continued until. In addition, instead of the control for setting the number of times such as "10000" times in the state B, the control for maintaining the high base state (state) until the next big hit may occur.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2203 that the completed jackpot game is neither the 4R 3rd jackpot nor the 2R 6th jackpot (NO in S2203), that is, the completed jackpot game is the 15R 1st jackpot, 4R 2nd jackpot, Or, if it is determined that it is one of the 15R 5th jackpots (NO in S2203), the process ends with the state B flag turned off. As a result, the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high-accuracy low-base state.

If it is determined in S2201 that the end is not a probability variation jackpot, that is, a low probability jackpot (low probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), the state B flag is turned ON (S2206) and the status B counter is set. Set "100" (S2207) and finish the process. As a result, the high base state of 100 times is set after the big hit game is completed, and the low accuracy high base state is obtained.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2124) will be described with reference to FIG. 42. In the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2124), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game generated this time is a special symbol. If it is determined that the item is related to 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 jackpot flag is turned off (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, in S3001, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001). ), Turn off the special figure 2 jackpot flag (S3004), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3005), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. 43. In the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening of the large winning device (second large winning device 36) has been completed in the small hit game. When it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is open (S2302). If S2302 determines that the big winning opening is not open (NO in S2302), it is time to open the big winning opening (2nd big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the small hit has passed. Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the first opening operation, or whether it is time to start the next opening operation after the time of the interval between the multiple opening operations has elapsed (S2303). .. Regarding the small hit game, the small hit game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined time elapses after the fixed stop display of the small hit symbol is displayed regardless of the passage of the start gate. That is, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big hit game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit.

If S2303 determines that it is not the time to open the big prize opening (NO in S2303), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2303 that it is the opening time of the big winning opening (YES in S2303), the opening processing of the second big winning opening 35 is performed according to the opening pattern of the small hit (see FIG. 6) (S2304). To finish. When it is determined by S2302 that the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the opening operation of 6 times, that is, 6 times It is determined whether or not the total number of game balls entered in the opening operation has reached the specified maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined by S2306 that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2306), it is time to close the big prize opening, that is, after opening the big winning opening, the predetermined number It is determined whether or not the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). Then, when it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2307), the process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the six opening operations has reached the specified number of balls (10) (YES in S2306), the large winning opening (second large winning prize) The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the process shifts to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small hit opening counter is set. One decrement is performed (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit open counter is "0" (S2310). When it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit opening counter is not "0" (NO in S2310), the next opening operation is started, so the process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit opening counter is "0" (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small hit end processing of S2311. In S2311, as the small hit end process for ending the small hit game, the small hit ending command is set (S2311), the small hit ending period is started (S2312), the small hit end flag is set (S2313), and the small hit end flag is set. Finish the process. The small hit opening counter becomes "0" when the large winning opening is opened 6 times.

In addition, when it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), the opening operation of 6 times has been completed (or a specified number of game balls have been entered). If it is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has elapsed (S2315) and it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), the special figure operation status setting process 2 is performed (S2317), and the process is completed. By generating a small hit game in a high accuracy and low base state, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls held, which enhances the game's interest. At the start of the small hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF, and are not switched from OFF to ON. Further, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317) will be described with reference to FIG. 44. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time. If it is determined that it is related to the special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned off (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is performed. Finish. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. In this embodiment, since the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit, the special figure 1 small hit flag is not turned ON. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101). ), Turn off the special figure 2 small hit flag (S3104), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3105), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Holded ball number processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number processing (S209) after the special drawing 2 operation processing (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read out ( S2501). Next, the data of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls command for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90 or the like) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process is completed.

[Power failure monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power failure monitoring process (S210) after the hold ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 46, in the power cutoff monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not there is an input of the power cutoff signal (S2601), and when it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined by S2601 that there is an input of a power off signal (YES in S2601), the current state of the game machine (whether it is a probability change, whether it is in a winning game, the number of reserved balls is several, the probability change / time reduction Data related to (the number of remaining fluctuations is several, etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power off flag is turned on (S2603), and then loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

As described in detail above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment has the above-mentioned characteristic configuration, and thus has a unique effect not found in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or is compared with the conventional pachinko gaming machine. And has a remarkable effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a big hit in the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct (the first special symbol (also referred to as "first information") or the second special symbol (also referred to as "second information") is a big hit. A high-probability state occurs (a privilege is given) based on a symbol (also referred to as a "specific display mode"), and a high-probability state (a privilege) is satisfied when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Is supposed to end.

The process of granting this high-probability state (privilege) (game state setting process (S2121)) can also be referred to as "privilege granting means". It should be noted that the first special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the second special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the variation display and the stop display are performed to show the same pass / fail judgment result. , "The special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol" can be replaced with "the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the hit effect symbol (specific display mode)". ..

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, timers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, the CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) and other settings, various flags, status and counter resets are performed.

Subsequently, the S4002 determines whether or not the power cutoff signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, if the power off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized, but due to a power failure or the like. If the power off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed after that. Further, in the first embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 also performs the same processing as the power supply cutoff monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. 11, and the power supply cutoff signal is generated due to a power failure or the like. When it is turned on, the data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, the data related to the effect control when a power failure such as a power failure occurs is backed up. Therefore, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) after the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 is performed. The state of is returned to the state before the power failure occurred.

The S4004 disables interrupts. Next, the random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining the effect are updated. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random numbers for determining the effect include random numbers for determining the variable effect that determine the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect pattern game effect to be executed, random numbers for determining the advance notice effect that determines the advance notice effect, and for determining the effect symbol that determines the effect symbol. There are random numbers and so on. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random numbers, the random numbers may not be added one by one, but may be added two by two. The random number for determining the effect is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) notifying that the starting ball has arrived is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80 ( It can be used when a fluctuation start command) is transmitted, or when a fluctuation effect pattern, which will be described later, is determined. The storage location of the acquired random number for determining the effect is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also referred to as “sub-output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are controlled by the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp. Among the boards 107, the command is transmitted to the control board to which the corresponding command is transmitted. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various effect devices (image display device, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. (Direction design game production, special game production related to hit game, etc.) is executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently enables interruption (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4008), the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of the effect symbols and the like executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. It is also possible to control the lighting of various lamps, control the operation of movable decorative members, control the sound output from the speaker, and the like.

[Receive interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt processing (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), first, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91 is determined. Judge (S4101). Then, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is completed. .. This receive interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 2 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, input processing for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). Next, the lamp data output process (S4202) for outputting the lamp data for causing the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 to emit light, and the drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source) are output. Drive data output processing (S4203) is performed. The lamp data and the drive data are created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, the watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, the received command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, a switch state acquisition process (S4303) is performed in which the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process, and the switch stored in the switch state acquisition process is performed. A switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the data is performed (S4304). After that, other processing such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the random number for determining the effect is executed (S4305).

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not the start entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and when it is determined that the start entry command has not been received (NO in S4401). , When it is determined that the start entry command has been received (YES in S4401), the process shifts to the S4403 process, and the effect hold information storage process (S4402) is performed to shift to the S4403 process. The effect hold information storage process (S4402) is a random operation for determining the jackpot type (preliminary judgment result, jackpot type determination) included in the start entry command (special figure 1 start entry command or special figure 2 start entry command) received by S4401. Game information such as numerical values and fluctuation pattern random values) is set according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the number of special symbol reserved balls when sending and receiving the start entry command (at the time of command generation). , It is stored in a predetermined effect hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in the shift memory format. For example, when the received start-in ball command is the special figure 1 start-in ball command corresponding to the number of reserved balls "4" in the special figure 1, the pre-judgment result and the hit type included in the special figure 1 start-in ball command. Etc. are stored as the special figure 1 effect hold information in the area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 effect hold information storage area. The effect hold information stored in this way is used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The storage content (effect hold information) of the effect hold information storage area in the sub-control board 90 is the special figure hold storage unit (first special figure hold storage unit, second special figure) in the main control board (main control unit) 80 described above. It matches the stored contents (acquired information) of the hold storage unit). From this, it can be said that the effect holding information storage area of the sub-control board 90 is also a “acquisition information storage means”.

Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and when it is determined that the fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4403), the variation effect start processing (YES) described later ( S4404) is performed to shift to the processing of S4405, and when it is determined that the fluctuation start command has not been received (NO in S4403), the processing shifts to the processing of S4405 without performing the fluctuation effect start processing. In S4405, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to display the variation effect. The variable effect end process to be terminated is performed (S4406). In the variation effect end process (S4406), a variation effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variation effect is set in the sub-output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect symbol 8 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The stop display is displayed, and the variable effect (effect pattern game effect) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process shifts to the processing of S4407 without performing the fluctuation production end processing. The variable effect refers to various effects performed according to the variable display of the special symbol.

Subsequently, the S4407 determines whether or not a hit game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 when executing the hit game (big hit game, small hit game), and specifically, the start of the big hit game (generation of big hit). ), The opening command sent at the start of the round, the round end command sent at the end of the round, the ending command sent at the end of the jackpot game, the first big prize opening in the round game The 1st big winning opening command sent based on the entry into 30 and the 2nd big winning opening entry command sent based on the entry into the 2nd big winning opening in the small hit game are applicable. .. The S4407 determines whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands has been received, and if it has not been received (NO in S4407), it shifts to the processing of S4409 and if it has been received (YES in S4407). , Performs processing related to the execution of the effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) according to the type of the received command (S4408).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command that specifies the opening effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if it is a round start command, the command is concerned. Set a round effect command in the sub output buffer to specify the round effect according to the round specified based on, and if it is an ending command, specify the ending effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command. Set the production command in the sub output buffer. If the received command is a big winning opening command (1st big winning opening command, 2nd big winning opening entry command), the big winning opening (1st big winning) specified based on the command A ball entry command that specifies the entry effect according to the entry into the opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35) is set in the sub output buffer. When various effect commands related to the set hit game are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 performs an opening effect and a round according to the progress of the hit game. The effect, the ball entry effect, and the like are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the processing of S4409 is performed, and this processing is completed. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other reception commands (for example, normal symbol fluctuation start command and normal symbol fluctuation stop command) other than the above-mentioned various commands is performed (S4409).

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the variation effect start process (S4404) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. 52. In the variation effect start process (S4404), first, the effect determination random number process (S4501) is performed to acquire various effect determination random numbers such as the variation effect determination random number, the advance notice effect determination random number, and the effect symbol determination random number. In this embodiment, the processing of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired value (acquired information), the mode of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) to be executed, the mode of the advance notice effect (including the presence or absence of the advance notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the like are determined.

Next, the S4502 analyzes the received fluctuation start command (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern specification command (information for designating the variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, the fluctuation pattern designation command includes the fluctuation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for designating the current game state, and the determination of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. The result, symbol information for specifying the jackpot type, and the like are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are two types of variable pattern designation commands, one corresponding to the first special symbol and the other corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variable pattern designation command, the effect symbol game production to be started this time is performed. It is possible to determine whether the (variable display of the effect symbol) is related to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. It should be noted that the variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in other processes other than the variation effect start process to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E. Specifically, the mode status "1" corresponds to the production mode A, the mode status "2" corresponds to the production mode B, the mode status "3" corresponds to the production mode C, and the mode status "4" corresponds to the production mode C. It corresponds to the production mode D, and the mode status "5" corresponds to the production mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current production mode.

Here, the effect mode is an aspect of the effect mainly using the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, a part or all of the effect modes of the game effect such as the advance notice effect and the reach effect are different. .. Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 is different depending on the effect mode, such as different aspects of the effect symbol 8 (for example, symbol design, number design, etc.), different characters, items, and background images. It will be different. In addition, the effect design game effect can also be executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode, and when a plurality of game effects (notice effect, reach effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects can be executed depending on the effect mode. Can be. In this embodiment, the effect modes A and B are executed when the effect mode is controlled to the low accuracy and low base state, the effect modes C and D are executed when the effect mode is controlled to the high accuracy and low base state, and the effect mode E is executed. Is executed when controlled to the low accuracy high base state and when controlled to the high accuracy high base state. Therefore, when the effect mode is any of A to D, the player confirms the effect mode to grasp whether the current game state is the low accuracy low base state or the high accuracy low base state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the effect mode is E, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current game state is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state even if the effect mode is confirmed. is there. In that sense, the effect mode E can be said to be a game state non-notification mode.

Next, in the S4504, the image display device 7, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like are used, and the variation effect pattern (variation effect pattern, effect pattern) controlled mainly by the sub control unit 90. A variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) and a notice effect determination table for determining the game effect) are set (S4504). Specifically, the variation effect pattern determination table to be used and the advance notice effect determination table are set based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern specification command received from the main control unit 80. .. That is, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables and a plurality of advance notice effect determination tables are provided, and a predetermined variable effect pattern determination table and advance notice effect determination table are set from them based on the game state (effect mode) and the like. To do. For example, when the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), the variation effect pattern determination table is used as the variation effect pattern determination table at the time of a big hit corresponding to the current effect mode. A variable effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set. The variable effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode (variable mode of the effect symbol, etc.) of the effect symbol game effect, and is a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status). (Not shown) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, the table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from those variable effect pattern determination tables.

Next, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the variation effect acquired in S4501 and the variation effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variation effect pattern suitable for the specified variation pattern is selected and set ( S4505). As the variation effect pattern, a variation mode (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) of the effect symbol 8 displayed mainly in the effect symbol display area 7b is set. As a result, in the effect symbol game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach-existing effect symbol game effect) or when the character effect performed using a specific character is executed (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect or character When the production is not executed (reach no production design game production), etc. are determined. In the reach effect, for example, as a display mode of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (doublet). In the case where the mode (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped display (temporary stop display) with the symbols constituting the jackpot mode (same effect symbol). ), And with the remaining one continuing the variable display (scroll display), whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol (three same effect symbols) that completes the jackpot mode. It is a production that shows. At this time, a game effect is executed using a predetermined character along with the variable display of the effect symbol, and whether or not the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode is determined by whether or not the predetermined character achieves the predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show it in the production of. Such a game production (reach production or character production described later) can also be referred to as a story production (specific game production) or a purpose production (specific game production). This makes it possible to raise the player's expectation for a big hit and enhance the game's interest.

Further, in S4505, the effect symbol 8 (also referred to as “stop effect symbol”) to be stopped and displayed is determined and set based on the random number for determining the effect symbol acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown). Production symbol The production symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the game production is out of the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, and if there is a reach, there are three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787". One of the production symbols is considered to be different from the other production symbols, and when there is no reach, at least one of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "635" is the other. It is said that the production pattern is different

Further, in S4506, the advance notice effect to be executed according to the variable effect pattern (effect pattern game effect) is determined. In addition, it is also referred to as a production design game production including this execution notice production. This notice effect shows the possibility that the result of the effect symbol game effect being executed is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode before the effect symbol is stopped or displayed (fixed stop display) (during the variable display of the effect symbol). Notification production). In S4506, based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect acquired in S4501 and the advance notice effect determination table set in S4504, the specified variation pattern and the advance notice effect matching the determined variation effect pattern are selected and set. (S4506).

Then, in S4507, based on the variation effect pattern and the advance notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, the variation effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect and the like is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 ( S4507), the variable production start process is completed. When the variation effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 determines the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. The predetermined image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in 1 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variation effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the variable display (blinking display) by the two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

[Outline of production design game production]
Next, the outline of the effect design game effect (variable effect) of this embodiment will be described. As described above, when the variation effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect based on the variation effect pattern set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the display screen 7a of. As a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the variable display of the effect symbol 8, the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) is configured.

In principle, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is a vertically scrolled display of the symbols in the order of "1"-> "2"-> "3" ...-> "7"-> "8"-> "9" (ascending order). (Vertical scrolling), and when it reaches "9", it returns to "1" and repeats vertical scrolling. The mode of the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is determined by the variation effect pattern stored in the variation effect pattern determination table described above. For this reason, in addition to vertical scrolling, there are various modes of variable display, such as horizontal scrolling display (horizontal scrolling) and switching display in which symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. The mode can be provided as a variable effect pattern. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols "1" to "9" are variablely displayed in descending order. Further, it is also possible to set the mode of variable display depending on the effect mode and the game state.

Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed according to the variation time determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display is stopped as the variation time elapses. However, in this embodiment, when the variation display is stopped. It has a plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) as modes. Specifically, as the main stop modes, (1) the stop order (also referred to as "stop order") of each of the effects symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), and 8R (right symbol) is "left symbol". → Stop mode in which the middle symbol → right symbol (also referred to as “first stop mode”) and (2) Stop mode in which the stop order of each symbol is “left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol” (“1st stop mode”) (Also referred to as "second stop mode") and (3) stop mode (also referred to as "third stop mode") in which all stop timings (stop timings) of each symbol are substantially the same (also referred to as "simultaneous stop"). And (4) a stop mode (also referred to as a "fourth stop mode") in which the stop time of the left symbol and the right symbol is substantially the same and the middle symbol is stopped after that. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and the change effect pattern selected (set) in S4505 determines in which stop mode the variation display is stopped. It has become a thing. That is, in this embodiment, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern also serves as the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, it is also possible to separately process the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern and the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). The stop symbol with the first stop order is also called the "first stop symbol", the stop symbol with the second stop order is also called the "second stop symbol", and the stop symbol with the third stop order is the third stop symbol. This is also called a "third stop symbol" or a "final stop symbol".

Of the first to fourth stop modes, in the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is “small” mainly in the effect mode C (state C). This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the "hit".

In the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is “missing” or “big hit” mainly in (1) effect modes A and B (state A). When the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the above, (2) in the effect mode E (state B), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" or "big hit". When the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in a variation mode with reach (also referred to as “reach variation”) or a variation mode without reach (also referred to as “normal variation”), and (3) effect mode C (3) In the state C), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by the reach variation or the normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being "missing" or "big hit", the variation display is performed. This is a stop mode that can be executed when the

The third stop mode (simultaneous stop of all symbols) is mainly in the situation where (1) the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls of the special figure works in the production modes A and B (state A) (at the start of fluctuation). Special figure 1 When the number of reserved balls is "3" or "4"), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing", and based on this, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation. , (2) In the effect mode E (state B), the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation based on the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination being "missing", and (3). ) In the effect mode C (state C), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being "missing", the variation display is stopped. This is a feasible stop mode.

In the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" or "big hit" mainly in the effect mode C (state C). Based on this, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by the reach variation, and (2) in the effect mode E (state B), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" or "big hit". This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variation display is stopped when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by the reach variation based on the above.

In this way, a plurality of stop modes for stopping the variation display of the effect symbol 8 are provided according to the effect mode (game state), the variation display mode based on the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, and the result (stop display mode). Therefore, it is possible to make the stopping mode different according to the situation of the game. Further, for the player, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped, it is possible to infer the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 to be displayed (derived display) thereafter. It becomes possible, and it is also possible to infer the type of special game that can be executed, the presence / absence of the execution, the possibility, etc. through the stop mode. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stopping mode when the variable display is stopped, and to arouse the expectation for the subsequent special game.

In addition to the first to fourth stop modes, for example, the stop order of the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 is "right symbol-> left symbol-> middle symbol" (fifth stop mode). ), And various stop modes such as a stop mode in which the left symbol and the middle symbol are stopped at substantially the same stop time and the right symbol is stopped after that (sixth stop mode), and each stop can be provided. The conditions under which the embodiment is executed are not limited to this embodiment, and can be variously defined.

Further, in this embodiment, the symbols "1" to "9" constituting the effect symbol 8 are colored so that they can be classified by color, and the type of symbol (symbol type) is determined by the color. This symbol type corresponds to the game state (effect mode). Specifically, in the state A (effect modes A and B), "7" among the odd-numbered symbols is a red symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as "red symbol"), and other odd-numbered symbols "1" and "3". , "5" and "9" are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "green symbols"), and even-numbered symbols "2", "4", "6" and "8" are blue symbols (hereinafter "blue"). It is also called "design"). On the other hand, in states B and C (effect modes C, D and E), among the odd-numbered symbols, "3", "5" and "7" are red symbols, and the other odd-numbered symbols are "1" and "9". Is a green symbol, and even-numbered symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue symbols.

It should be noted that the correspondence between the design and the color shown in this embodiment is merely an example, and it is possible to adopt a correspondence relationship other than this, and the type of color is not limited to this embodiment, and other colors are used. Can be used. Further, in this embodiment, the symbol type (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by the color, but it can also be determined by an element other than the color. For example, the type of character when a character is attached to the effect symbol, and the number symbol when there is an effect symbol (character symbol) representing a predetermined character in addition to the effect symbol (number symbol) representing a number. The symbol type may be determined by the character symbol, and further, the symbol type may be determined simply by the odd symbol and the even symbol.

The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed, and the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derivated display) when the variable display is stopped according to the above-mentioned stop mode is used. The result of the fluctuation display is notified. In this embodiment, as a basic symbol combination (stop display mode), there are "completely disjointed eyes" ("124", etc.) in which all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are different symbols (numbers), and the effect symbols. 8L (left symbol) and production symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number), and the remaining production symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a different symbol (number). ) Is an out-of-order mode (non-specific mode) that does not trigger the execution of the winning game. On the other hand, "doublet" ("777", etc.) in which all three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same is used as a jackpot mode (specific mode) that triggers the execution of a jackpot game (see FIG. 6) of 4R or more. There is.

On the premise of such a basic combination of symbols, in this embodiment, the "reach barrage" among the loose stitches is also used as the 2R jackpot mode that triggers the execution of the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). .. This is because the number of prize balls that the player can acquire (the number of prize balls won) is smaller in the 2R jackpot game than in the 4R or higher jackpot game (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game), and the state C (high). It is a special game that triggers the setting of state B (high base state), which makes it more difficult to obtain a prize ball (increase the number of balls held) in a small hit game than (probability low base state), that is, for the player. This is because it is a special game with a relatively low degree of advantage (profit amount). Further, among the loose stitches, the "completely loose stitch" is also used as the small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). This is because, as described above, in the state B, the second starting port 21 is in the open state for most of the time, so that the small hit large winning opening (second) located on the downstream side of the second starting port 21. This is because it is difficult to enter the large winning opening 35), and it is extremely unlikely that a small hit will be profitable (nearly zero) (substantially equivalent to a loss). Further, among the loose stitches, the "specific loose stitch" described later is set as a small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (small hit of the second special symbol) in the state C (high accuracy and low base state). Here, the small hit mode (specific disparity) is also referred to as a "first display mode", and the big hit mode (doublet) is also referred to as a "second display mode", and the disengagement mode (complete disparity, reach disparity). Of the (eyes), the reach-separated number is also referred to as a "third display mode", and among the out-of-order modes (completely disjointed eyes, reach disjointed eyes), the completely disjointed eye is also referred to as a "fourth display mode".

Since the state A (low probability low base state) is a game state in which a left-handed game is basically performed, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (the first) based mainly on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 20. 1 Special symbol variation display) is performed, and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (second special symbol variation display) is rarely performed during the variation display of the first special symbol. When the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made under such circumstances, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation is caused by the effect display 102. Only display (and stop display) is to be performed. Similarly, the state B (high base state) is a game state in which a right-handed game is basically performed, and the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (first special) mainly based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 21. (Fluctuation display of symbols) is performed, and it is rare that the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (variation display of the second special symbol) is performed during the variation display of the first special symbol. When the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made below, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation display by the effect display 102 ( And stop display).

Similarly, since the state C (high accuracy and low base state) is a game state in which a right-handed game is basically performed, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment mainly based on the entry into the third starting port 26 ( The second special symbol variation display) is performed, and the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (first special symbol variation display) is rarely performed during the variation display of the second special symbol. When the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made under such a situation, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but is performed by the effect display 102. Only variable display (and stop display) is to be performed.

However, when a special symbol hit / fail judgment contrary to the current game state (left-handed game, right-handed game) is performed and a judgment result of "big hit" is obtained (for example, in the state C, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made. (When a big hit is made), one or more of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display an effect suggesting the occurrence of the big hit. Do. As a result, while the effect display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to the current gaming state (variation display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, the effect display is performed in parallel with the variation display of the main special symbol. It is possible to inform the player that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of such a big hit, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player stops the game without noticing the occurrence of the big hit and misses the opportunity to earn a profit.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61. Here, FIG. 53 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. In the following description, the description of the configuration and common processing common to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be omitted, and the configuration and processing different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be mainly described. Do. Further, in the second embodiment, the display screen of the first image display device 7 (see FIG. 3) is referred to as the first display screen 7a, and the display screen of the second image display device 71 (see FIG. 1) is the second display screen. It is referred to as 71a, and the display screen of the third image display device 72 (see FIG. 2) is referred to as a third display screen 72a.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, in addition to the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b described above in the first embodiment, the first effect button on the front frame 51 is used as an input means capable of input by the player. A cross key is provided at a position close to 63a. This cross key is configured to have an up key, a down key, a left key, and a right key, and the player operates one of the cross keys to perform the first display screen 7a or the third. It is possible to change the selection of the item displayed on the display screen 72a and to highlight an item different from the highlighted item.

As illustrated in FIG. 53, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, in addition to the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b, a key for detecting that one of the cross keys has been operated is used. The operation detection switch 63e is connected. When the player operates any of the cross keys (up key, down key, left key, or right key), a detection signal notifying that the key operation is detected is output to the sub-control board 90. Note that different detection signals are output depending on whether the up key is operated, the down key is operated, the left key is operated, or the right key is operated. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 can specify which of the four keys constituting the cross key is operated based on the detection signal from the key operation detection switch 63e. Is.

[About various settings related to production]
Next, various settings related to the effect will be described with reference to FIG. 54. Here, FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various settings of the effect. As illustrated in FIG. 54, the settings related to the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment can be roughly classified into a first setting and a second setting.

(Example of the first setting)
As the first setting, as illustrated in FIG. 54, volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment can be mentioned. The volume adjustment is a function for adjusting the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 67, and the player presses the cross key and the first one while the volume / light amount adjustment screen (see FIG. 55 (B)) described later is displayed. The volume of the effect sound can be changed by performing a predetermined operation using the effect button 63a. The light amount adjustment is a function for adjusting the light amount of the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a, and the player presses the cross key and the first one while the volume / light amount adjustment screen is displayed. The amount of light of the above three display screens can be changed by performing a predetermined operation using the effect button 63a.

(Example of the second setting)
As the second setting, as illustrated in FIG. 54, there are a premier mode, a one-shot notification mode, a look-ahead reduction mode, an auto button, a back button suggestion, and a treble adjustment.

The premier mode is a function that can be set to a mode in which so-called "premier production", which occurs only when the judgment result of the special symbol winning / failing judgment is "big hit", is more likely to occur than usual. The player can switch between the premier mode and the non-premier mode by performing a predetermined operation using the cross key and the first effect button 63a while the (see FIG. 55C) is displayed. As a premier effect, a predetermined character called a premier character is displayed on the screen prior to the stop display of the effect symbol indicating doublet notifying that the judgment result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is "big hit". An example is the production to be performed.

The one-shot notification mode is a function that can be set to a mode in which a definite notification effect, so-called "one-shot notification", which occurs only when the judgment result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is "big hit", is more likely to occur than usual. Yes, the player performs a predetermined operation using the cross key and the first effect button 63a while the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55 (C)) is displayed, so that the one-shot notification mode and the non-one-shot notification mode can be set. It is possible to switch between. As one notification, a predetermined notification sound is output from the speaker 67 prior to the stop display of the doublet-indicating effect symbol indicating that the judgment result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is "big hit". At the same time, an effect of causing the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 to emit light in rainbow colors is given as an example.

The look-ahead reduction mode is a function that can be set to a mode in which the so-called "look-ahead effect", which is executed based on the above-mentioned pre-judgment result (pre-judgment result), is less likely to occur than usual, and is a production customization screen (FIG. 55). (See (C)) is displayed, the player can switch between the look-ahead reduction mode and the non-look-ahead reduction mode by performing a predetermined operation using the cross key and the first effect button 63a. As an example of the look-ahead effect, a hold look-ahead effect in which a hold image (hold icon) indicating that the right to determine whether the special symbol is correct or not is held is displayed in a display mode different from the usual one can be mentioned.

The auto button is a function that generates an operation-compatible effect in the same manner as when the first effect button 63a is operated without operating the first effect button 63a, and the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55 (C)) is displayed. In this state, the player can perform a predetermined operation using the cross key and the first effect button 63a to switch between "ON" and "OFF" of the function related to the auto button.

The back button suggestion is a so-called "operation-corresponding effect" in which the player operates the first effect button 63a during the valid period without the operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a. The "back button" is a function that suggests that it is in the valid period, and a predetermined operation in which the player uses the cross key and the first effect button 63a while the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55 (C)) is displayed. By performing the above, it is possible to switch between "ON" and "OFF" of the function related to the back button suggestion. When this back button suggestion is set to "ON", for example, the button lamp built in the first effect button 63a emits light during the above-mentioned valid period.

The treble adjustment is a function of cutting the treble range of the effect sound output from the speaker 67, and the player presses the cross key and the first effect button while the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55 (C)) is displayed. By performing a predetermined operation using the 63a, it is possible to switch between "ON" and "OFF" of the function related to the treble adjustment.

(Characteristics of various settings)
Up to this point, the outline of various settings classified into the first setting or the second setting has been described, but the first setting and the second setting have the following features.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the game effect non-progress state (non-effect progress state) in which the game effect of changing the effect symbol is not performed according to the change display of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) When the first hour (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the transition to the game production non-progress state without ending the game production non-progress state, the non-game reset selection screen (FIG. 57). See) is displayed. This non-game reset selection screen is a selection screen displayed when one or a plurality of settings classified into the second setting are set differently from the initial settings, and is classified into the second setting. This is a screen for the player to select whether or not to reset (return to the initial settings) the various settings to be performed at once.

By the way, the reset selection screen during non-game is not limited to the case where a certain player (first player) temporarily interrupts and restarts the game, and another player (second player) starts the game. Although it is also displayed at the time, the premier mode, the one-shot notification mode, the look-ahead reduction mode, the auto button, and the back button suggestion change the game production or affect the game production, so the second game When the player starts the game, it is preferable that the second player can easily select whether or not to reset these second settings (set by the first player). Further, if at least one effect setting classified into the second setting is performed, the content of the second setting is displayed on the third display screen 72a (see FIG. 56), and the content is displayed by another player. It is preferable for the first player to stop the game without being given the opportunity to choose whether or not to reset the second setting, as it may be known to (eg, the second player). Absent.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the first time (here, 10 seconds) elapses after the transition to the game production non-progress state, the pachinko game machine 1 is classified into the effect setting (here, the second setting). As a selection promotion effect that prompts the player to select whether or not to return the various settings) to the initial settings, the non-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) is started to be displayed, and the non-game reset selection screen is displayed. Inside, there is a configuration in which various settings classified into the second setting cannot be changed, that is, a change operation for the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55 (C)) cannot be performed (for example, a configuration in which the effect customization screen is not displayed). It has been adopted (see FIG. 54).

For example, if the first time is set to a relatively short time such as 3 seconds, for example, the game ball does not easily win a prize at the first starting port 20 in the low probability low base state, and the game production is frequently in a non-progressing state. The reset selection screen during non-game is often displayed, and as a result, the first player may be uncomfortable. On the other hand, if the first time is set to a relatively long time such as 30 seconds, the waiting time from when the first player stops the game until the display of the non-game reset selection screen is started becomes long, and the first time becomes longer. From the viewpoint that the setting of 2 can be easily reset by the first player, this configuration is not preferable. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the first time is set to 10 seconds in consideration of these points.

On the other hand, even if the volume of the speaker 67 and the amount of light of each display screen are set differently from the initial settings, the content of the game effect is not changed and the game effect is not significantly affected. Compared to the setting of 2, it is considered that there is less need for the player (for example, the first player) to select whether or not to reset the first setting. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the player's selection as to whether or not to reset the various effect settings classified into the second setting is prioritized while the non-gaming reset selection screen is displayed. In addition, when the volume or light amount cannot be adjusted and reset is selected on the non-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 57), that is, the operation for selecting to return the effect setting to the initial setting is performed. If performed while the non-game reset selection screen is displayed, the display of the non-game reset selection screen (selection promotion effect) ends and the second setting is reset (returned to the initial setting). A configuration is adopted in which the first setting is not reset (it is not returned to the initial setting) (see FIG. 54).

By the way, regarding the volume of the speaker 67 and the amount of light of each display screen, there is no big problem even if the second player is informed of the contents of the settings made by the first player, and whether or not the first player resets them. It is considered that there is little need to adopt a configuration in which the above can be arbitrarily selected. On the other hand, for example, while the volume of the speaker 67 is set to the maximum (in the second embodiment, “5” of the five stages: see FIG. 55 (B)), the next player of the first player When the second player, who is a player, starts the game, a loud game effect sound is output from the speaker 67 along with the start of the game effect, which surprises the second player and makes the second player uncomfortable. There is a possibility of giving. Further, for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is left in a state where the amount of light of each display screen is set to the minimum (in this embodiment, "1" in the five stages: see FIG. 55 (B)), each Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is inconspicuous even if the customer waiting effect is performed using the display screen, it is considered that the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is difficult to improve.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the second time (5 minutes in the second embodiment) elapses without ending the non-progressing state of the game effect after the transition to the non-progressing state of the game effect, The volume of the speaker 67 and the amount of light on each display screen are automatically reset (returned to the initial settings) without prompting the player to select whether or not to reset the volume / light amount settings. Specifically, the volume of the speaker 67 is returned to "1", which is the minimum volume of the five stages, and the amount of light of each display screen is returned to "5", which is the maximum light amount of the five stages.

In the second embodiment, the case where the initial setting of the volume of the speaker 67 is the minimum volume "1" and the initial setting of the light amount of each display screen is the maximum light amount "5" will be described as an example. On the other hand, in another embodiment, the initial setting of the volume of the speaker 67 may be a volume other than the minimum volume, and the initial setting of the light amount of each display screen is a light amount other than the maximum light amount. You may. For example, the volume of the speaker 67 may be returned to "3" in the middle of the five stages, and the amount of light of each display screen may be returned to "3" in the middle of the five stages.

In addition, after the non-game reset selection screen is selected whether or not to reset the effect settings and the non-game reset selection screen is displayed, the player adjusts the volume and light intensity, which will be described later. It is possible to display the screen and change the volume and amount of light.

<Specific examples of various screens displayed on the third display screen 72a>
Next, various screens displayed on the third display screen 72a will be described with reference to FIG. 55. Here, FIG. 55 is a screen view illustrating various screens displayed on the third display screen 72a.

(Customization reception screen)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the game effect progress state in which the effect symbol is changed and displayed according to the change display of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol), and the above-mentioned game When the non-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) is not displayed in the non-progressing state, the customization reception screen illustrated in FIG. 55 (A) is displayed on the third display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. Will be done. This customization reception screen is configured to include a cross key image that imitates the cross key and a message such as "You can customize the production" to notify that it is possible to change various settings related to the production. Has been done.

As is clear from the notation of FIG. 55 (A), in the cross key image constituting the customization reception screen, the left key and the right key are displayed in a display mode different from that of the up key and the down key. Specifically, for example, the left and right keys are highlighted more than the up and down keys. Therefore, the player who sees the cross key image can switch the customization reception screen to another screen for actually customizing the production by operating the left key or the right key of the cross key. It is possible to easily recognize that there is.

(Customized number notification image, customization content notification image)
Further, if any one of the settings classified into the above-mentioned second setting (see FIG. 54) is changed from the initial setting, the upper part of the third display screen 72a is displayed while the customization reception screen is being displayed. A customized number notification image and a customized content notification image are displayed in the area. Here, the customized number notification image is an image that notifies the number of settings that are different from the initial settings based on the player's selection operation among the various settings classified into the second setting. , FIG. 55 (A) displays a customized number notification image including the characters "3 production customizations" in order to notify that the number of settings different from the initial settings is 3. The situation is illustrated.

FIG. 56 is a screen view showing a specific example of the customized number notification image and the customized content notification image displayed on the third display screen 72a. Here, the customized number notification image is as described above based on FIG. 55 (A). On the other hand, the customized content notification image is an image that sequentially notifies the contents of the settings that are different from the initial settings among the various settings classified into the second setting (FIG. 55 (A), FIG. 56 (A)-(C)).

For example, as illustrated in FIG. 54 (B), among the various settings classified into the second setting, the initial settings are set with respect to the three settings of "premier mode", "look-ahead reduction mode", and "back button suggestion". If the settings are different from the settings, for example, after the customized content notification image (see FIG. 56 (A)) including the characters of "premier mode" is displayed for 1.5 seconds, the characters of "look-ahead reduction mode" are displayed. The customized content notification image (see FIG. 56 (B)) including the customized content notification image (see FIG. 56 (B)) is displayed for 1.5 seconds, and then the customized content notification image (see FIG. 56 (C)) including the characters “back button suggestion” is displayed for 1.5 seconds. Displayed for seconds. Then, after the customized content notification image (see FIG. 56 (C)) including the characters “back button suggestion” is displayed for 1.5 seconds, the customized content notification image (see FIG. 56 (C)) including the characters “premier mode” is displayed. See A)) is displayed again.

In this way, when a plurality of settings among the various settings classified into the second setting are set differently from the initial settings, the characters indicating the contents of the plurality of settings are switched in order. Moreover, the display of the customized content notification image is updated as appropriate so that it is displayed repeatedly.

By the way, for example, as described above, when the three settings of "premier mode", "look-ahead reduction mode", and "back button suggestion" are set differently from the initial settings, the characters "premier mode" are included. It is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which the customized content notification image including the characters of "look-ahead reduction mode", the customized content notification image including the characters of "back button suggestion", and the customized content notification image including the characters of "back button suggestion" are displayed side by side in the vertical direction. Be done.

However, in this configuration, the larger the number of effects that are set different from the initial settings, the larger the number of customized content notification images to be displayed on the third display screen 72a. There may be a problem that it becomes difficult to use the effect (for example, an effect of displaying a character or a character that notifies the jackpot reliability).

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the customized number notification image notifies the number of settings that are different from the initial settings in the second setting, and the customized number is notified. In the display area (an example of the first display area) directly below the display area (an example of the second display area) where the notification image is displayed, the customized content notification image showing the contents of the settings different from the initial settings in order is displayed. To. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the number and contents of the settings different from the initial settings in an easy-to-understand manner while suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

The customized number notification image and the customization content notification image are similarly displayed in the upper region of the third display screen 72a even while the non-game reset selection screen is displayed (see FIG. 57). Therefore, whether or not the player resets these settings after confirming the number and contents of the settings that are different from the initial settings based on the customized number notification image and the customized content notification image. It is possible to judge.

(Volume / light intensity adjustment screen)
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 55, when the player operates (presses) the left key or the right key while the customization reception screen (see FIG. 55 (A)) is displayed, the volume / light amount adjustment screen is displayed on the third display screen 72a. Is displayed (see FIG. 55 (B)). Specifically, the characters "volume" that compose the volume image included in the volume / light amount adjustment screen are highlighted, and the volume can be adjusted. The volume / light amount adjustment screen includes a volume image, a light amount image, a first cross key image, a second cross key image, and a first effect button image.

Here, the volume image (see FIG. 55 (B)) is a display object that includes any of the numbers "1" to "5" and is highlighted among five display objects having different sizes. It is an image which shows the volume by the number of. The light image (see FIG. 55 (B)) is based on the number of display objects highlighted among the five display objects each containing any of the numbers "1" to "5" and having different sizes. It is an image showing the amount of light.

The first effect button image (see FIG. 55 (B)) is an image imitating the first effect button 63a, and the characters “decision” are displayed immediately below the first effect button image. Therefore, the player determines (confirms) the volume / light amount changed (increased / decreased) by operating the cross key while the volume / light amount adjustment screen is displayed by operating (pressing) the first effect button 63a. It can be easily recognized that it is possible to make it.

The second cross key image (see FIG. 55 (B)) is a cross key image displayed between the first cross key image and the first effect button image, and the up key and the down key are the left key and the down key. It is highlighted more than the right key. Then, the characters "increase / decrease" are displayed immediately below the second cross key image. Therefore, the player who sees the second cross key image and the characters immediately below it can increase or decrease the volume (or the amount of light) by operating the up key or the down key of the cross key. It can be easily recognized.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 55 (B), the display object including the characters "volume" constituting the volume image is highlighted more than the display object including the characters "light intensity" constituting the light intensity image. ing. In this state, the volume can be adjusted, and the player can increase or decrease the volume by operating the up key or the down key of the cross key. In FIG. 55 (B), the display object including the character "1" and the display object containing the character "2" are highlighted, so that the current volume is "2" out of five levels. Is shown. On the other hand, for example, when the player operates the down key once, the display object including the character "1" is highlighted, and the player operates the first effect button 63a to increase the volume. Is changed to the minimum "1". Conversely, for example, when the player operates the up key twice, the four display objects of the display object containing the character "1" to the display object containing the character "4" are highlighted, and the player By operating the first effect button 63a, the volume is changed to "4".

The first cross key image (see FIG. 55 (B)) is a cross key image displayed on the left side of the second cross key image, with the left and right keys highlighted more than the up and down keys. ing. Then, the characters "switch" are displayed immediately below the first cross key image. Therefore, the player who sees the first cross key image and the characters immediately below it can customize the volume / light amount adjustment screen by operating the left key of the cross key (see FIG. 55 (A)). It can be easily recognized that the light intensity can be adjusted by returning to and operating the right key.

When the player operates the right key of the cross key only once while the volume / light amount adjustment screen illustrated in FIG. 55 (B) is displayed, a display object including the characters "volume" constituting the volume image. Instead of, the display object including the characters "light intensity" constituting the light intensity image is highlighted. In this state, the amount of light can be adjusted as described above, and the amount of light can be increased or decreased by the player operating the up key or the down key of the cross key. In FIG. 55 (B), the current amount of light is "4" out of five stages by highlighting the display object containing the character "4" from the display object containing the character "1". It is shown. On the other hand, for example, when the player operates the down key twice, the display object containing the character "1" and the display object containing the character "2" are highlighted, and the player becomes the first. By operating the effect button 63a, the amount of light is changed to "2". Conversely, for example, when the player operates the up key once, all five display objects of the display object containing the character "1" to the display object containing the character "5" are highlighted, and the game is played. When a person operates the first effect button 63a, the volume is changed to the maximum "5".

(Production customization screen)
In addition, the player operates the right key once when the display object containing the characters "light intensity" is highlighted, that is, when the volume / light intensity adjustment screen indicating the state in which the light intensity can be adjusted is displayed. Then, the volume / light amount adjustment screen is switched to the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55 (C)). This effect customization screen includes a premier mode setting image, a one-shot notification mode setting image, a look-ahead reduction mode setting image, an auto button setting image, a back button suggestion setting image, a treble adjustment setting image, and a third cross. It is composed of a key image, a fourth cross key image, and a first effect button image.

Here, the premier mode setting image is an image showing the setting status of the premier mode, and the characters "OFF" are highlighted in the state where the premier mode is not set, and instead of the characters "OFF", When the character "ON" is highlighted as illustrated in FIG. 55 (C), the premier mode is set. The one-shot notification mode setting image is an image showing the setting status of the one-shot notification mode, and the characters "OFF" are highlighted when the one-shot notification mode is not set (see FIG. 55 (C)). ), When the character "ON" is highlighted instead of the character "OFF", the one-shot notification mode is set.

The look-ahead reduction mode setting image is an image showing the setting status of the look-ahead reduction mode, and the characters "OFF" are highlighted when the read-ahead reduction mode is not set. When the character "ON" is highlighted as illustrated in FIG. 55 (C), the look-ahead reduction mode is set. The auto button setting image is an image showing the setting status of the auto button, and the characters "OFF" are highlighted when the auto button function is not enabled (see FIG. 55 (C)), and "OFF". When the character "ON" is highlighted instead of the character ", the auto button function is enabled.

The back button suggestion setting image is an image showing the setting status of the back button suggestion, and the character "OFF" is highlighted when the back button suggestion function is not enabled, instead of the character "OFF". , When the character "ON" is highlighted as illustrated in FIG. 55 (C), the back button suggestion function is enabled. The treble adjustment setting image is an image showing the setting status of the treble adjustment, and the characters "OFF" are highlighted when the treble adjustment function is not enabled (see FIG. 55 (C)), and "OFF". When the character "ON" is highlighted instead of the character ", the treble adjustment function is enabled.

The first effect button image (see FIG. 55C) is an image imitating the first effect button 63a, and is used for switching between “ON” and “OFF” of the setting image in which the cursor is located. Immediately below this first effect button image, the characters "decision change" are displayed. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 55 (C), the cursor is positioned so as to surround the item image including the characters of "one notification mode" constituting the one notification mode setting image, and "OFF". When the character "" is highlighted, the player operates the first effect button 63a to highlight the character "ON" (instead of the character "OFF") and enter the one-shot notification mode. Set.

The fourth cross key image (see FIG. 55 (C)) is an image displayed between the third cross key image and the first effect button image, and the up key and the down key are from the left key and the right key. Is also highlighted. Then, the characters "cursor movement" are displayed immediately below the fourth cross key image. Therefore, the player who sees the fourth cross key image and the characters immediately below it can move the cursor up and down by operating the up key or the down key of the cross key. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 55 (C), the player operates the lower key of the cross key once in a situation where the cursor is positioned so as to surround the item image including the characters of "one notification mode". Then, the cursor moves downward so as to surround the item image including the characters of the "look-ahead reduction mode" instead of the item image including the characters of the "one-shot notification mode". When the player operates the first effect button 63a in this state, the character "ON" is highlighted in place of the character "OFF" related to the look-ahead reduction mode setting image, and the look-ahead reduction mode is set.

As illustrated in FIG. 55 (C), when the production customization is performed so that the characters "ON" are strongly displayed for the three setting images, the customization including the characters "3 production customizations" is performed. The number notification image (see FIG. 55 (A)) is displayed.

The third cross key image (see FIG. 55 (C)) is a cross key image displayed on the left side of the fourth cross key image, in which the left and right keys are highlighted more than the up and down keys. ing. Then, the characters "switch" are displayed immediately below the third cross key image. Therefore, the player who sees the third cross key image and the characters immediately below it switches the effect customization screen to the volume / light amount adjustment screen by operating the left key of the cross key, and operates the right key. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the effect customization screen can be switched to the reset selection screen during the game (see FIG. 55 (D)).

(Reset selection screen during game)
When the player operates the right key of the cross key while the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55 (C)) is displayed, the effect customization screen is switched to the reset selection screen during the game (see FIG. 55 (D)). As illustrated in FIG. 55 (D), this in-game reset selection screen includes a message "Do you want to reset the effect settings?", A "No" selection item, and a "Yes" selection item. It is composed of a fifth cross key image and a first effect button image.

Here, in the fifth cross key image, the up key and the down key are highlighted more than the left key and the right key, and the player operates the up key or the down key of the cross key to "no". It is possible to move the cursor between the selection item of and the selection item of "Yes". The first effect button image is an image imitating the first effect button 63a, and the characters "decision" are displayed immediately below the image.

By the way, in the initial setting of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the premier mode setting image, the one-shot notification mode setting image, the look-ahead reduction mode setting image, and the auto button on the above-mentioned effect customization screen (see FIG. 55 (C)) are set. The setting image, the back button suggestion setting image, and the treble adjustment setting image are all in a state in which the characters "OFF" are highlighted. On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 55 (C), the player operates the up key or the down key of the cross key in a state where the three settings are different from the initial settings. If the cursor is moved to the "Yes" selection item and the first effect button 63a is operated in this state, all the settings classified into the second settings are returned to the initial settings. As a result, on the production customization screen, the premier mode setting image, the one-shot notification mode setting image, the look-ahead reduction mode setting image, the auto button setting image, the back button suggestion setting image, and the treble adjustment setting image are all "OFF". The characters are highlighted.

(End screen)
Although not shown in the figure, when the player operates the right key of the cross key while the reset selection screen during the game is displayed, a predetermined end screen is displayed. On this end screen, the message "Do you want to end the production settings?", The "Yes" selection item, the "No" selection item, the cross key image similar to the above 5th cross key image, and the 5th 1 The effect button image is displayed, and when the player operates the first effect button 63a with the cursor positioned so as to surround the "Yes" selection item, the effect setting is completed and the customization reception screen (customization reception screen) (See FIG. 55 (A)) is displayed again.

(Reset selection screen during non-game)
FIG. 57 is a screen view illustrating a non-game reset selection screen displayed on the first display screen 7a of the first image display device 7. In FIG. 57, in order to notify that the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment executed in the low-accuracy low-base state is "missing", three effect symbols showing the disparity of "526" are stopped and displayed. The state of being done is illustrated. Here, when the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is correct is reserved, a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) is set after the first special symbol and the effect symbol for notifying the loss are stopped and displayed. When the elapse has passed, the reserved first special symbol hit / fail determination is executed, and the variable display of the next first special symbol and the effect symbol is started. On the other hand, if the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is correct is not reserved, the game effect non-progress state in which the game effect for displaying the effect symbol in a variable manner does not progress will continue, and the state shifts to the game effect non-progress state. After the first hour (10 seconds in the second embodiment) has elapsed, the non-game reset selection screen is displayed (see FIG. 57).

As illustrated in FIG. 57, this non-game reset selection screen includes a message "The production customization is being set. Do you want to reset?", A "Yes" selection item, and a "No" selection item. It is composed of a cross key image in which the up key and the down key are highlighted more than the left key and the right key, and a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 63a.

On the non-game reset selection screen, the player can move the cursor to the "Yes" selection item or the "No" selection item by operating the up or down key of the cross key. If the first effect button 63a is operated with the cursor positioned on the "No" selection item, the setting changes made to the effect customization screen are maintained. Conversely, if the first effect button 63a is operated with the cursor positioned on the "Yes" selection item, the setting changes made to the effect customization screen are reset and classified as the second setting. All the settings to be made will be reset to the initial settings.

However, the non-game reset selection screen is a selection screen for resetting the second setting, not a selection screen for resetting the first setting. Therefore, the setting classified into the first setting is set according to the operation of the first effect button 63a with the cursor positioned on the "Yes" selection item while the non-game reset selection screen is displayed. It will never be reset. As described above, the settings classified into the first setting (in the second embodiment, the setting related to the volume and the setting related to the amount of light) shift to the game production non-progressing state, and then the game production non-progressing state ends. The default setting is reset on condition that the second time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed without any operation.

While the non-game reset selection screen is displayed, it is necessary for the player to select whether or not to reset the effect setting, so depending on whether the right or left key of the cross key is operated. It is not preferable to display the volume / light amount adjustment screen (see FIG. 55 (B)) or the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55 (C)). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, in the lower area of the third display screen 72a, instead of the message "the effect can be customized" (see FIG. 55 (A)), "other selection screen is being displayed. In addition to displaying a message such as ", for example, a cross-key image is displayed semi-transparently to notify the player that the effect cannot be customized in an easy-to-understand manner (see FIG. 57).

[About the permission period for various operations related to production settings]
Next, referring to FIG. 58, the permission period for which the volume / light amount adjustment operation for the volume / light amount adjustment screen (see FIG. 55 (B)) is permitted, and the effect customization for the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55 (C)). The permission period during which the operation is permitted and the permission period during which the reset selection operation for the non-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) are permitted will be described. Here, FIG. 58 is a time chart illustrating the permission period for adjusting the volume / light amount, customizing the effect, and selecting the reset during non-game.

As illustrated in FIG. 58 (A), for example, when the game is controlled in a low-accuracy low-base state, in a situation where the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol are repeated, the first special symbol The effect symbol is varied and displayed along with the variable display, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the first special symbol. In this way, in the game production progress state in which the game effect of intermittently displaying the effect symbol in accordance with the variable display of the first special symbol is performed intermittently, the above-mentioned customization reception screen is always displayed based on FIG. 55 (A) and the like. It is displayed. For this reason, when the game production is in progress, the volume / light amount adjustment screen can be displayed by operating the left or right key of the cross key while the customization reception screen is displayed, so that the volume classified into the first setting can be set. The amount of light can be adjusted. In addition, when the game production is in progress, various settings classified as the second setting can be changed by operating the left key or right key of the cross key to display the production customization screen while the customization reception screen is displayed. It is possible.

Therefore, it can be said that the game production progress state is a permission period in which the volume / light amount adjustment is permitted and the production customization is permitted. It should be noted that the non-game reset selection screen is displayed until the first time (10 seconds in the second embodiment) elapses after the game production has stopped progressing, that is, after the effect symbol has not been displayed in a variable manner. (See FIG. 57) display does not start. Therefore, the period from the transition to the non-progressing state of the game effect to the elapse of the first time is also a permitted period in which the volume / light amount adjustment and the effect customization are permitted (see FIG. 58 (A)).

On the other hand, when the game effect does not progress and the first time elapses after the transition to the game effect non-progress state, the display of the non-game reset selection screen is started. Since the operation of the left key and the right key of the cross key is invalid while the reset selection screen during non-game is displayed (see the screen view of the third display screen 72a in FIG. 57), the left key of the cross key or the left key of the cross key or It is not possible to display the volume / light amount adjustment screen or the effect customization screen by operating the right key. Therefore, it can be said that while the reset selection screen during non-game is being displayed, it is a prohibited period in which volume / light amount adjustment and effect customization are prohibited.

In FIG. 58 (A), the effect customization is reset for the non-game reset selection screen while the game effect non-progress state continues even after the first time has elapsed since the transition to the game effect non-progress state. An example is the case where a choice is made as to whether or not to do so. In this case, in the non-game effect non-progress state, the display of the non-game reset selection screen ends when the selection of whether to reset is made, and the volume / light amount adjustment and the effect customization are permitted accordingly. Transition to the permit period (see FIG. 58 (A)).

The non-game reset selection screen is a selection screen that is displayed when the game effect is not in progress, and is not displayed when the game effect is in progress. Therefore, although not shown in FIG. 58, when the game ball wins a prize in the first start port 20 in the game production progress state and shifts from the game production non-progress state to the game production progress state, the game is in non-game. The reset selection screen is erased from the first display screen 7a, and along with this, the period shifts to the permission period in which volume / light amount adjustment and effect customization are permitted.

FIG. 58 (B) illustrates a case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate at the same time in the low probability low base state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the third starting port 26 is always open as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily win the game ball in the third starting port 26 by hitting the right side, and in the low probability low base state, the second selected according to the winning. As the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, a fluctuation pattern having an extremely long fluctuation time such as 600 seconds is easily selected (see FIG. 9). Therefore, when the game is controlled in the low accuracy and low base state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may change at the same time.

On the other hand, in the low-accuracy low-base state, one of the effect symbols is variable display / stop display so as to be linked with the first special symbol, but is not variable display / stop display so as to be linked with the second special symbol. .. Therefore, as illustrated in FIG. 58 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol ends in the situation where the variation display of the second special symbol is continued in the low accuracy low base state, this Along with the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the effect symbol also ends, and the state shifts from the game effect progress state to the game effect non-progress state.

In this way, in the case of shifting from the simultaneous fluctuation state in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously fluctuating to the game production non-progressing state, the game production is not performed as described above based on FIG. 58 (A). When the first hour (10 seconds in the second embodiment) elapses after the transition to the progress state, the display of the reset selection screen during non-game is started, and the volume / light amount adjustment and the effect customization are prohibited accordingly. It will shift to the ban period.

As is clear from the notation of FIG. 58, the effect control microcomputer 91 has a volume / light amount when a predetermined operation for adjusting the volume / light amount is performed when the reset selection screen during non-game is not displayed. While allowing the change of, while the reset selection screen during non-game is displayed, even if the predetermined operation for adjusting the volume / light amount is performed, the change of the volume / light amount according to the predetermined operation is not changed. It is configured as. If the selection as to whether or not to return the various settings classified as the second setting to the initial settings is made while the non-game reset selection screen is displayed, the display of the non-game reset selection screen ends. Along with this, changes in volume and light intensity are permitted.

<Production control based on the first setting>
(Output control of production sound)
When an operation for changing the volume is performed on the volume / light amount adjustment screen (see FIG. 55 (B)), the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment executes the following processing. That is, the RAM of the sub-control board 90 stores volume information indicating the current volume. The effect control microcomputer 91 updates the volume information so as to indicate the volume selected by the player when a predetermined operation is performed on the volume / light amount adjustment screen for changing the volume. Then, the voice control board 106 is made to execute a process of outputting the effect sound (for example, the game effect sound output in association with the game effect) from the speaker 67 at the volume indicated by the updated volume information.

(Display control of production image)
When an operation for changing the light amount is performed on the volume / light amount adjustment screen (see FIG. 55B), the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment executes the following processing. That is, the RAM of the image control board 100 stores light amount information indicating the current light amount. When a predetermined operation on the volume / light amount adjustment screen for changing the light amount is performed, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits a light amount command for notifying that the operation for changing the light amount has been performed to the image control board 100. To do.

This light amount command includes information indicating the light amount selected by the player, and the image control microcomputer 101 indicates the light amount specified from the information included in the received light amount command. Update the information. Then, the first image display device 7 and the second image display device are displayed so that the effect image is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a with the light amount indicated by the updated light amount information. The display control of the 71 and the third image display device 72 is executed.

<Production control based on the second setting>
(Premier mode)
When an operation for setting the premier mode is performed on the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C), the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment executes the following processing. The ROM of the sub-control board 90 stores a premier effect determination table for the normal mode and a premier effect determination table for the premier mode. These premier production decision tables are used when deciding whether or not to execute the premier production when the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment performed in the low probability / low base state is "big hit". It is a table referred to in, and in each case, a random number value is associated with each of "with premier effect" and "without premier effect". Further, in the premier effect determination table for the premier mode, more random values are associated with "premier effect" than in the premier effect determination table for the normal mode.

When the game is controlled in the low accuracy and low base state, the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the fluctuation start command when it receives the fluctuation start command related to the first special symbol winning / failing determination from the main control board 80. Based on the information indicating the determination result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination this time is a "big hit". Here, if it is determined to be a "big hit", a process for determining whether or not to execute the premier production is performed.

Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives a fluctuation start command related to the "big hit" with respect to the premier effect execution decision random number that is appropriately updated every time the random number update process is performed on the sub-control board 90. Is acquired as a random number for determining the execution of the premier effect. Then, normally, the premier effect is executed based on whether or not the acquired premier effect execution decision random number matches the random number value associated with "premier effect" in the normal mode premier effect determination table. Decide whether or not.

On the other hand, when the operation for setting the premier mode is performed on the effect customization screen and the mode is set to the premier mode, the effect control microcomputer 91 uses the acquired premier effect execution decision random number as the premier for the premier mode. It is determined whether or not to execute the premier effect based on whether or not it matches the random number value associated with "with premier effect" in the effect determination table.

As described above, in the premier effect determination table for the premier mode, more random values are associated with "premier effect" as compared with the premier effect determination table for the normal mode. Therefore, when the premier mode is set, the appearance rate of the premier effect is improved as compared with the case where the premier mode is not set.

(One notification mode)
When an operation for setting the one-shot notification mode is performed on the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C), the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment executes the following processing. The ROM of the sub-control board 90 stores a one-shot notification determination table for the normal mode and a one-shot notification determination table for the one-shot notification mode. These one-shot notification decision tables determine whether or not to execute one-shot notification when the judgment result of the first special symbol winning / failing judgment performed in the low probability / low base state is "big hit". It is a table that is referred to at the time of the operation, and a random number value is associated with each of "with one notification" and "without one notification". Further, in the one-shot notification determination table for the one-shot notification mode, more random values are associated with "one-shot notification" than in the one-shot notification decision table for the normal mode.

When the game is controlled in the low accuracy and low base state, the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the fluctuation start command when it receives the fluctuation start command related to the first special symbol winning / failing determination from the main control board 80. Based on the information indicating the determination result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination this time is a "big hit". Here, when it is determined that it is a "big hit", a process for determining whether or not to execute the one-shot notification is performed.

Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the fluctuation start command related to the "big hit" with respect to the one-shot notification execution decision random number that is appropriately updated every time the random number update process is performed on the sub-control board 90. The value is acquired as a one-shot notification execution decision random number. Then, usually, one shot is based on whether or not the acquired one-shot notification execution decision random number matches the random number value associated with "one-shot notification" in the one-shot notification decision table for normal mode. Decide whether to carry out the announcement.

On the other hand, when the operation for setting the one-shot notification mode is performed on the effect customization screen and the one-shot notification mode is set, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the acquired one-shot notification execution determination random number. , It is determined whether or not to execute the one-shot notification based on whether or not it matches the random number value associated with "one-shot notification" in the one-shot notification determination table for the one-shot notification mode.

As described above, in the one-shot notification determination table for the one-shot notification mode, more random values are associated with "one-shot notification" than in the one-shot notification determination table for the normal mode. Therefore, when the one-shot notification mode is set, the appearance rate of the one-shot notification is improved as compared with the case where the one-shot notification mode is not set.

(Read-ahead reduction mode)
When an operation for setting the look-ahead reduction mode is performed on the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C), the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment executes the following processing. The ROM of the sub-control board 90 stores a look-ahead effect determination table for the normal mode and a look-ahead effect determination table for the look-ahead reduction mode. These pre-reading effect determination tables are tables that are referred to when deciding whether or not to execute the so-called pre-reading effect based on the result of the pre-determination described above in the first embodiment, and all of them have "pre-reading effect". A random value is associated with each of "" and "no look-ahead effect". Further, in the look-ahead effect determination table for the look-ahead reduction mode, a random number value smaller than that in the look-ahead effect determination table for the normal mode is associated with "with look-ahead effect".

When the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the special figure 1 start ball entry command from the main control board 80 when the game is controlled in the low accuracy and low base state, the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the special figure 1 start ball entry command. Based on the pre-judgment information, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed. Specifically, for example, when the corresponding first special symbol hit / fail determination is executed based on the prior determination information, whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol whose fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time is selected. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed. Here, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect can be executed, a process for determining whether or not to actually execute the look-ahead effect is performed.

Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 is the basis for determining that the look-ahead effect can be executed with respect to the pre-reading effect execution determined random number that is appropriately updated each time the random number update process is performed on the sub-control board 90. The value of the timing at which the special figure 1 start entry command including the determination information is received is acquired as a look-ahead effect execution decision random number. Then, normally, the look-ahead effect is executed based on whether or not the acquired look-ahead effect execution decision random number matches the random number value associated with "pre-reading effect" in the normal mode look-ahead effect decision table. Decide whether or not.

On the other hand, when the operation for setting the look-ahead reduction mode is performed on the effect customization screen and the read-ahead reduction mode is set, the effect control microcomputer 91 reduces the look-ahead effect execution determination random number acquired. It is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on whether or not it matches the random number value associated with "with look-ahead effect" in the mode look-ahead effect determination table.

As described above, in the look-ahead effect determination table for the look-ahead reduction mode, a smaller random number value is associated with "with look-ahead effect" than in the look-ahead effect determination table for the normal mode. Therefore, when the look-ahead reduction mode is set, the appearance rate of the look-ahead effect is lower than when the look-ahead reduction mode is not set.

(Auto button)
When an operation for enabling the auto button is performed on the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C), the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment executes the following processing. At the start of the game effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an effective period during which the operation of the first effect button 63a (or the second effect button 63b) becomes effective during the game effect. On the other hand, when the valid period is started, the image control microcomputer 101 has a button image imitating the first effect button 63a (or the second effect button 63b) and an operation for prompting, for example, an operation of "press!". The operation promotion effect of displaying the promotion character and the validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period on the first display screen 7a is executed.

When the auto button function is not enabled, when the player operates the first effect button 63a (or the second effect button 63b) during the above valid period, an operation notification command for notifying the operation is imaged from the sub control board 90. It is transmitted to the control board 100, and for example, an operation-compatible effect for displaying a predetermined effect image on the first display screen 7a is executed. On the contrary, if the operation is not performed during the valid period, such an operation-corresponding effect is not executed.

On the other hand, when the operation for enabling the auto button is performed on the effect customization screen and the auto button function is enabled, the effect control microcomputer 91 is, for example, during the above-mentioned effective period. At the timing when half of the valid period has elapsed, a command instructing the execution of the operation-corresponding effect is transmitted to the image control board 100. In this way, by performing a predetermined operation for enabling the auto button on the effect customization screen, the operation can be supported without operating the first effect button 63a (or the second effect button 63b). It is possible to execute the production.

(Auto button)
When an operation for validating the back button suggestion is performed on the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C), the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment executes the following processing. For example, at the start of the game effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an effective period during which the operation of the first effect button 63a becomes effective during the game effect. Some of the valid periods set in this way do not execute the above-mentioned operation promotion effect, and the player presses the back button based on, for example, the effect image displayed on the first display screen 7a. It is necessary to specify the valid period and operate the first effect button 63a during the valid period to generate an operation-corresponding effect.

On the other hand, when an operation for enabling the back button suggestion is performed on the effect customization screen and the back button suggestion function is enabled, the effect control microcomputer 91 is, for example, the above-mentioned operation promotion effect. The button lamp built in the first effect button 63a is turned on via the lamp control board 107 during the valid period without the above. In this way, when the player performs a predetermined operation for validating the back button suggestion on the effect customization screen, the button image, the operation promotion character, and the validity period gauge are not displayed during the validity period. However, it is possible to suggest (imply) to the player that it is in the valid period.

(Treble adjustment)
When an operation for enabling the treble adjustment is performed on the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C), the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment executes the following processing. When the treble adjustment function is not enabled, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs the first game effect sound accompanying the game effect from the speaker 67, for example, via the voice control board 106.

On the other hand, when the operation for enabling the treble adjustment is performed on the effect customization screen and the treble adjustment function is enabled, the effect control microcomputer 91 is set via the voice control board 106. The second game effect sound in which the high frequency range of the game effect sound of 1 is cut is output from the speaker 67. This makes it possible to output a production sound that is less likely to be offensive to the player.

[Command reception process waiting for winning by the sub-control board 90]
Next, the winning command reception process executed on the sub-control board 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. Here, FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating a winning command waiting command reception process executed on the sub-control board 90.

When the game is controlled in the low-accuracy low-base state, the game control microcomputer 81 ends the variable display of the first special symbol in a state where the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is correct is not reserved. A winning-waiting command for notifying the start port 20 that the game ball is waiting for winning is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. In this way, when the game ball is in the state of waiting for a prize, the game effect of fluctuating the effect symbol is not progressed along with the variable display of the first special symbol. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 91 issues this prize waiting command. By receiving the command, it is possible to specify the transition from the game effect progress state to the game effect non-progress state.

As illustrated in FIG. 59, the effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not the winning award waiting command transmitted from the main control board 80 has been received as described above (step S111). Here, when it is determined that the winning command is received (step S111: YES), that is, when the game effect non-progress state is entered, the measurement of the elapsed time from the transition to the game effect non-progress state is started. (Step S112), the measuring flag stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is set to “ON” (step S113). This measuring flag is a flag indicating whether or not the elapsed time has been measured since the transition to the game production non-progress state, and is set to "ON" when the elapsed time measurement is started. It is set to "OFF" at the end of the time.

When the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the process of step S113, or determines that the winning command is not received (step S111: NO), whether or not the measuring flag is set to "ON". (Step S114). Here, if it is determined that the measuring flag is not set to "ON" (step S114: NO), a series of winning command reception processing is completed, and the processing is returned to step S111.

When the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the measurement flag is set to "ON" (step S114: YES), the first time after the transition to the game effect non-progress state (in the second embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91). It is determined whether or not 10 seconds) has elapsed (step S115). Specifically, when the measurement of the elapsed time is started by the process of step S112, the information indicating the elapsed time (elapsed time information) is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 and is appropriately updated as the time elapses. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 91 elapses the first time after shifting to the game production non-progress state based on whether or not the elapsed time specified by the elapsed time information matches the first time. Determine if it has been done.

When the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the first time has elapsed since the transition to the game effect non-progress state (step S115: YES), for example, a command for instructing the display start of the non-game reset selection screen is issued. By transmitting to the image control board 100, the image control microcomputer 101 starts displaying the reset selection screen during non-game (step S116). Then, the adjustment / change prohibition flag stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is set to “ON” (step S117). This adjustment / change prohibition flag is a state in which the volume / light amount adjustment screen (see FIG. 55 (B)) is displayed and the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55 (B)) is displayed. It is a flag indicating whether or not the change of the effect customization in is prohibited, and it is set to "ON" when the display of the reset selection screen during non-game is started, and the reset selection screen during non-game is displayed. It is set to "OFF" at the end.

When the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the process of step S117, or when it is determined that the first time has not elapsed since the transition to the game effect non-progress state (step S115: NO), the game effect non-progression It is determined whether or not the second time (5 minutes in the second embodiment) has elapsed since the transition to the progress state (step S118). Specifically, the second time has elapsed since the transition to the game production non-progress state based on whether or not the elapsed time specified by the elapsed time information stored in the RAM matches the second time. Judge whether or not. Here, when it is determined that the second time has elapsed since the transition to the game production non-progress state (step S118: YES), the volume / light amount is reset (step S119). Specifically, the volume information is updated so that the volume information stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 indicates the minimum volume "1", and the light amount information stored in the RAM of the image control board 100 is displayed. A command instructing the execution of the process of updating the light amount information so as to indicate the maximum light amount “5” is transmitted to the image control board 100.

In this way, the effect control microcomputer 91 is a game effect based on the determination result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination in the low accuracy and low base state when the setting classified into the second setting is changed from the initial setting. When the first time elapses without ending the game effect non-progress state after the transition to the game effect non-progress state in which is not progressing, the display of the non-game reset selection screen is started. Then, when the second time elapses without ending the game production non-progress state (longer than the first time) after shifting to the game production non-progress state, the first setting (here, the light amount / volume setting) ) To the default settings.

[Operation support processing by the sub-control board 90]
Next, the operation-corresponding processing executed on the sub-control board 90 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. Here, FIGS. 60 and 61 are flowcharts illustrating operation-corresponding processes executed on the sub-control board 90. When the first effect button 63a, the second effect button 63b, or the cross key is operated, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the operation-corresponding process described below.

That is, as illustrated in FIG. 60, the effect control microcomputer 91 has whether or not a detection signal from the first effect button detection switch 63c, the second effect button detection switch 63d, or the key operation detection switch 63e has been input. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the operation by the player has been performed (step S120). Here, when it is determined that the operation by the player has not been performed (step S120: NO), the operation correspondence process is completed and the process is returned to step S120.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the first time (10 seconds in the second embodiment) has elapsed since the transition to the non-progressing state of the gaming effect without ending the non-progressing state of the gaming effect. However, if this configuration is adopted, the following problems may occur. That is, in this configuration, for example, a player who is playing is trying to adjust the volume / light amount and customize the effect by operating the cross key or the first effect button 63a immediately after shifting to the game effect non-progress state. Despite this, the first hour has passed since the transition to the non-game production non-progress state, and the display of the non-game reset selection screen starts, making it impossible to adjust the volume / light amount and customize the production. Problems can occur.

Therefore, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, for example, when an operation is performed by the player between the transition to the game production non-progress state and the elapse of the first time, the game production is performed. It is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which the reset selection screen during non-game is not displayed by stopping the measurement of the elapsed time after the transition to the non-progress state.

However, if such a configuration is easily adopted, another problem may occur such that various settings classified into the second setting cannot be reset at once.
Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of such another problem, the operation by the player before the first time elapses after the transition to the game production non-progressing state. When is performed, the elapsed time from the transition to the game production non-progress state is reset, and the elapsed time is measured again based on the timing at which the operation is performed. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the following processing.

That is, when the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the operation by the player has been performed (step S120: YES), is the measuring flag stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 set to "ON"? Whether or not it is determined (step S121). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the transition to the game production non-progress state is being measured. Here, when it is determined that the measuring flag is set to "ON" (step S121: YES), the elapsed time indicated by the elapsed time information stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 becomes "0". The elapsed time is reset as described above (step S122), and the measurement of the elapsed time is started again (step S123).

In this way, when the measuring flag is set to "ON", by performing the process of step S122 and the process of step S123, the final operation performed by the player in the game production non-progress state can be performed. The display of the non-game reset selection screen is started at the timing when the first time elapses after the first time is performed, and as a result, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned plurality of problems at the same time.

Here, when an operation is performed by the player in the game production non-progressing state, the display of the non-game reset selection screen is started at the timing when the first time has elapsed from the operation. However, in another embodiment, for example, a third time (for example, 7 seconds) shorter than the first time has elapsed since the last operation by the player in the game production non-progress state. The display of the reset selection screen during non-game may be started at the same timing.

When the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the process of step S123, or determines that the measuring flag is not set to "ON" (step S121: NO), whether or not the game effect is in progress. Is determined (step S124). For example, if the fluctuation start command related to the first special symbol hit / miss determination is received from the main control board 80 and the fluctuation stop command is not yet received, it can be determined that the game effect is in progress. Further, if the fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) (for example, 0.6 seconds) has elapsed after receiving the variable stop command (the special symbol is stopped and displayed), it can be determined that the game production is in progress.

When the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the game effect is in progress (step S124: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the operation promotion effect is in the valid period (step S125). When the operation promotion effect is executed during the game effect including the variable display of the effect symbol, the information indicating the valid period related to the operation promotion effect is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed, the operation promotion effect is in the valid period based on the elapsed time from the start of the game effect and the information indicating the valid period stored in the RAM. It can be determined whether or not. If the information indicating the valid period related to the operation promotion effect is not stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90, it is determined in step S125 that the operation promotion effect is not in the valid period.

When the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the operation promotion effect is in the valid period (step S125: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the effect button has been operated (step S126). Specifically, when the operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the first effect button 63a is executed, the first effect button 63a is set based on the presence or absence of the detection signal from the first effect button detection switch 63c. Determine if it has been manipulated. On the other hand, when the operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the second effect button 63b is executed, is the second effect button 63b operated based on the presence or absence of the detection signal from the second effect button detection switch 63d? Judge whether or not.

When it is determined that the effect button has been operated (step S126: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the operation-compatible effect (step S127). For example, when the first effect button 63a is operated during the operation promotion effect performed before the reach of the effect symbol is established, an effect image showing how a predetermined character emits a dialogue is displayed on the first display screen 7a. A command for instructing the execution of an operation-corresponding effect called a dialogue notice is transmitted to the image control board 100. Further, for example, when an operation promotion effect for prompting the operation of the second effect button 63b is executed at the end of the high-reliability reach effect and the second effect button 63b is operated during the valid period of this operation promotion effect, the game effect The movable decorative member 14 is operated, and the LED, the board lamp 5, and the frame built in the movable decorative member 14 are operated on the condition that the judgment result of the first special symbol winning / failing judgment performed at the start of is "big hit". A command for instructing the execution of the effect of causing the lamp 66 to emit light in rainbow colors is transmitted to the lamp control board 107.

On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the operation promotion effect is not in the valid period (step S125: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the left key or the right key of the cross key has been operated (step S128). .. Here, since it is determined as "YES" in step S124, the customization reception screen (see FIG. 55 (A)), the volume / light amount adjustment screen (see FIG. 55 (B)), and the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55 (C)). ), Or the reset selection screen during the game (see FIG. 55 (D)) is displayed on the third display screen 72a, and these are performed according to the operation of the left key or the right key of the cross key by the player. It is necessary to switch the screen of. In order to realize such screen switching processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the following processing.

That is, when it is determined that the left key or the right key of the cross key has been operated (step S128: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the switching process (step S129). Specifically, for example, when the operation of the right key is detected while the customization reception screen is displayed, a command for instructing the execution of the process of switching the customization reception screen to the volume / light amount adjustment screen is transmitted to the image control board 100. .. Further, for example, when the operation of the left key is detected while the effect customization screen is displayed, a command for instructing the execution of the process of switching the effect customization screen to the volume / light amount adjustment screen is transmitted to the image control board 100. Further, for example, when the operation of the right key is detected while the effect customization screen is displayed, a command for instructing the execution of the process of switching the effect customization screen to the reset selection screen during the game is transmitted to the image control board 100.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect control microcomputer 91 is not in the game effect progress state (step S124: NO), that is, in the game effect non-progress state in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub-control board 90 It is determined whether or not the adjustment / change prohibition flag stored in the RAM is set to “ON” (step S130). This adjustment / change prohibition flag is a flag that is set to "ON" when the non-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) starts to be displayed (see steps S116 and 117 in FIG. 59), and is a non-game reset. When the selection screen is not displayed, it is set to "OFF".

When the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the adjustment / change prohibition flag is not set to "ON" (step S130: NO), that is, when the non-game reset selection screen is not displayed, the third display is displayed. Since the various screens displayed on the screen 72a can be switched, the process of step S128 is executed in the same manner as when "NO" is determined in the process of step S125.

On the other hand, when the adjustment / change prohibition flag is set to "ON", the non-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) is being displayed, and depending on the operation of the up key or the down key of the cross key, You need to move the cursor between the "Yes" and "No" selections. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the adjustment / change prohibition flag is set to “ON” (step S130: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the process of step S132 described later.

The effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the left key or the right key of the cross key is not operated (step S128: NO), or that the adjustment / change prohibition flag is set to "ON". In the case (step S130: YES), the up key or down key of the cross key is based on whether or not a detection signal notifying that the up key or down key of the cross key is operated is input from the key operation detection switch 63e. Is determined whether or not has been operated (step S132). Here, when it is determined that the up key or the down key of the cross key is not operated (step S132: NO), the process proceeds to step S137 (see FIG. 61) described later.

While the customization reception screen (see FIG. 55 (A)) is being displayed, the screen can be switched by the player operating the left key or the right key of the cross key. On the other hand, the up and down keys of the cross key do not function while the customization reception screen is displayed. Therefore, when the customization reception screen is being displayed, the process of step S132 does not determine "YES", but the process of step S132 determines "NO" and the process proceeds to step S137.

When it is determined that the up key or the down key of the cross key has been operated (step S132: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the volume / light amount adjustment screen is being displayed (step S133). Specifically, the RAM of the sub-control board 100 includes a customization reception screen (see FIG. 55 (A)), a volume / light amount adjustment screen (see FIG. 55 (B)), and an effect customization screen (see FIG. 55 (C)). ), And screen information indicating which screen of the reset selection screen during the game (see FIG. 55 (D)) is displayed on the third display screen 72a is stored. In step S133, the effect control microcomputer 91 is displaying the volume / light amount adjustment screen based on whether the screen indicated by the screen information stored in the RAM is the volume / light amount adjustment screen. To judge.

By the way, among the volume / light amount adjustment screen, the effect customization screen, and the reset selection screen during the game illustrated in FIGS. 55 (B) to (D), the increase / decrease process is performed according to the operation of the up key or the down key of the cross key. It is necessary to execute only the volume / light amount adjustment screen, and for the other two screens, it is necessary to execute the cursor movement process that moves the cursor according to the operation of the up key or down key of the cross key. .. Therefore, when it is determined that the volume / light amount adjustment screen is being displayed (step S133: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the increase / decrease process (step S134). Specifically, when the display object including the character "volume" on the volume / light amount adjustment screen (see FIG. 55 (A)) is highlighted, the effect control microcomputer 91 responds to the operation of the upper key. , Sends a command to the image control board 100 to instruct the execution of the process of increasing the displayed object highlighted by one among the five display objects constituting the volume image, and responds to the operation of the down key to obtain the volume image. A command for instructing execution of a process of reducing the number of display objects highlighted by one among the five display objects constituting the image control board 100 is transmitted to the image control board 100. Further, when the display object including the characters "light amount" on the volume / light amount adjustment screen (see FIG. 55 (A)) is highlighted, the effect control microcomputer 91 responds to the operation of the upper key to obtain a light amount image. A command for instructing the execution of the process of increasing the number of display objects highlighted by one among the five display objects constituting the image control board 100 is transmitted to the image control board 100, and a light amount image is configured according to the operation of the down key. A command is transmitted to the image control board 100 instructing execution of a process of reducing the number of display objects highlighted by one among the five display objects.

On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the volume / light amount adjustment screen is not being displayed (step S133: NO), that is, the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55B) or the game reset selection screen (step S133: NO). When the display (see FIG. 55 (C)) is being displayed, a command for instructing the execution of the process of moving the cursor as described above based on FIGS. 55 (B) to (C) is transmitted to the image control board 100.

When it is determined that the up key or the down key of the cross key is not operated (step S132: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 is displaying the volume / light amount adjustment screen as illustrated in FIG. Whether or not it is determined (step S137). The determination process in step S137 is performed in the same manner as the process in step S133 described above.

When the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the volume / light amount adjustment screen is being displayed (step S137: YES), the process of step S120 is based on the presence or absence of the detection signal from the first effect button detection switch 63c. It is determined whether or not the operation determined that the operation by the player has been performed is the operation of the first effect button 63a (step S138). Here, when it is determined that the operation is the operation of the first effect button 63a (step S138: YES), the volume / light amount setting process is executed (step S139). Specifically, when the volume increase / decrease process is executed in the process of step S134, the volume information is updated so that the volume information stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 indicates the volume after the increase / decrease process. .. Further, when the increase / decrease process related to the light amount is executed in the process of step S134, the light amount information stored in the RAM of the image control board 100 including the information for notifying the light amount after the increase / decrease process is specified by the notified information. A command instructing the execution of the update process to indicate the amount of light to be performed is transmitted to the image control board 100.

When the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the process of step S139, it determines that the volume / light amount adjustment screen is not being displayed (step S137: NO), or the operation by the player is the first effect button 63a. (Step S138: NO), it is determined whether or not the effect customization screen is being displayed based on the screen information stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 100 (step S140). ..

When it is determined that the effect customization screen is being displayed (step S1410: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the customization process (step S141). Specifically, the RAM of the sub-control board 90 stores customization information indicating the contents of various settings classified into the second setting, and the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the effect customization screen. Update the customization information so that the setting changes of each setting are reflected. Then, the customized content notification pattern is set (step S142). Specifically, regarding various settings displayed on the effect customization screen, the number of settings changed to "ON" is specified based on the customization information, and the customized number notification image (see FIG. 56) notifies the effect. The number of the above is determined, and the information indicating the determination result is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as the setting information of the custom content notification. In addition, the contents of the settings that have been changed to "ON" for various settings displayed on the production customization screen are specified based on the customization information, and the order in which the specified setting contents are displayed is determined. Information indicating the determination result is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as setting information for custom content notification.

Following the process of step S142, the effect control microcomputer 91 includes the two setting information stored in the RAM in the process of step S142, and the customization content notification (customized number notification image and customization) described above based on FIG. 56. A customized content notification command instructing the execution of the content notification image display) is transmitted to the image control board 100 (step S143). As a result, as described above based on FIG. 56, a customized number notification image showing the number of settings different from the initial settings among the various settings classified into the second settings is displayed. , The customized content notification image is displayed so that the contents of the settings that are different from the initial settings are shown in order. In FIG. 56, since the premier mode, the look-ahead reduction mode, and the back button suggestion are all set to “ON”, the characters indicated by the customized content notification image are “premier mode”, “look-ahead reduction mode”, and “ An example shows how to switch in the order of "back button suggestion".

When the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the effect customization screen is not being displayed (step S140: NO), that is, the game reset selection screen (see FIG. 55 (D)) or the non-game reset selection screen (FIG. When the display of (see 57) is being displayed, it is determined whether or not “Yes” is selected (step S144). Specifically, it is based on whether or not a detection signal notifying that the first effect button 63a has been operated is input from the first effect button detection switch 63c while the cursor is located on the "Yes" selection item. Then, it is determined whether or not "Yes" is selected. Here, if it is determined that "Yes" is not selected (step S144: NO), a series of operation-corresponding processes are completed, and the process is returned to step S120.

On the other hand, when it is determined that "Yes" is selected (step S144: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the customization initialization process (step S145). Specifically, the customization information stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is information indicating that all the settings classified into the second setting are set to "OFF" (initial setting). Update the customization information so that.

When the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the process of step S145 or determines that "Yes" is not selected (step S144: NO), it is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 100, for example. Based on whether or not the adjustment / change prohibition flag is set to “ON”, it is determined whether or not the reset selection screen during non-game is being displayed (step S146). Here, when it is determined that the non-game reset selection screen is being displayed (step S146: YES), the image control board 100 ends the non-game reset selection screen display (step S147), and adjustment / change is prohibited. The flag is set to "OFF" (step S148). Then, after the display of the non-game reset selection screen is completed, the elapsed time is reset (step S149) in the same manner as in the processes of steps S122 and 123 in order to display the non-game reset selection screen again as needed. ), The measurement of the elapsed time is started (step S150).

Here, based on FIGS. 59 to 61, the process executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 in order to realize the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment has been described, but in other embodiments, this effect is described. A part of the processing executed by the control microcomputer 91 may be executed on the image control board 100.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 73. Here, FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the effect executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment in accordance with the variation display of the first special symbol in the low accuracy and low base state. The flow of this effect will be described with reference to FIG. 62. In the following description, the description of the configuration common to the pachinko gaming machines 1 of the first and second embodiments and the common processing will be omitted, and the configuration mainly different from that of the pachinko gaming machines 1 of the first and second embodiments will be described. The processing will be described.

When the first special symbol winning / failing determination is executed in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 20 in the low probability low base state, the first special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 41a. , The first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, on the first display screen 7a, the variation display of the effect symbol (in this embodiment, the variation display of the three symbol strings) is started with the start of the variation display of the first special symbol (FIG. 62). See (A)). Specifically, for example, when the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode, which is one of a plurality of effect modes (see FIG. 64), in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3), "1" Each symbol row is displayed in three rows in the horizontal direction so that a part of the symbol rows of the effect symbols in which the numbers from "9" are continuously written in the vertical direction is displayed. (See, for example, FIG. 66 (A)). Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the scroll display of the three symbol rows is started so that these symbol rows scroll from top to bottom (for example, FIG. 66 (B). )reference).

Immediately after the variable display of each symbol sequence is started or immediately after the so-called pseudo-continuous effect is executed, each symbol sequence scrolls at high speed and it becomes difficult to visually recognize (identify) the effect symbol. In each screen view of FIG. 66 (B) and the like, in order to express such a state, the state in which each symbol sequence is scrolling at high speed is indicated by a broken line with an arrow indicating the scroll direction.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the display mode and the variation mode of the effect symbol differ depending on the effect mode of the variation effect (the effect including the variation display of the effect symbol) performed on the first display screen 7a. It has characteristics. The display mode and variation mode of the effect symbol for each effect mode will be described in detail later.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 62, when the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment performed at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is "missing" and it is determined not to execute the reach effect. That is, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol in which the reach effect is not executed is selected, the three effect symbols showing the disparity (for example, "294") are pseudo-stopped at the end of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the first 1 As the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, a lost notification effect is performed to stop these three effect symbols (see FIG. 62 (B)). Here, "pseudo-stop" means swinging the effect symbol displayed at a predetermined position on the spot with almost no movement, and in the following description, the main stop (simply) to completely stop the effect symbol. When distinguishing from "stop display"), it may be called "pseudo stop".

Up to this point, the variable effect when the determination result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" and the reach effect is not executed has been described, but the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment is "big hit". In some cases, or when it is decided to execute the reach effect of the "missing", that is, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol on which the reach effect is executed is selected, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. Inside, for example, the left symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3), and the symbol row in the right column is moved so that the right symbol common to the left symbol moves on the effective line. A pre-reach effect of scrolling at a low speed is performed (see FIG. 62 (C)). In addition, the pre-reach effect is not limited to this, and after the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the right symbol is first pseudo-stopped on the effective line, and then the left symbol common to this right symbol is on the effective line. The left symbol and the right symbol (same as the left symbol) are pseudo-stopped on the effective line at the same time after the effect of scrolling the left column symbol row at a low speed so as to move to or the variable display of the effect symbol is started. As such, an effect of moving these symbols toward the effective line may be executed as a pre-reach effect.

As a result of performing these pre-reach effects, when the common left symbol and right symbol are pseudo-stopped on the effective line, the reach is established (see FIG. 62 (D)). In this way, when the effect symbols common to the left and right symbols stop in a pseudo manner and reach is established, the effect symbols common to these effect symbols (reach symbols) stop on the effective line in the middle row. A reach production that makes people expect is performed. In the third embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 62, the normal short reach, the normal long reach, the first SP reach, as the reach effect that can be executed with the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accuracy and low base state, Five types of reach effects, the second SP reach and the SPSP reach, are prepared.

The normal short reach (see FIG. 62 (E)) is a reach effect having the lowest jackpot reliability among the above five types of reach effects (for example, jackpot reliability: about 2%). This normal short reach is a reach effect in which the effect execution time is shorter than that of the normal long reach described later, and when the reach is established, the normal short reach is usually performed. When this normal short reach is performed, when the reach is established, the scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row gradually decreases, and the same middle symbol or reach symbol as the reach symbol is between the left and right symbols forming the reach. The scroll display of the middle symbol string that pseudo-stops the middle symbol different from the above is performed (for example, see FIG. 63 (B)).

Here, when a variable effect pattern for notifying the winning is set in the normal short reach, the winning notification effect (hit notification effect or loss notification effect) is performed at the end of the normal short reach (see FIG. 62 (F)). .. Specifically, when the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "big hit", doublet (for example, "222") is obtained by pseudo-stopping the same medium symbol as the reach symbol on the effective line. After the effect symbols indicating the above are pseudo-stopped, a hit notification effect is performed in which these effect symbols are stopped as they are. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment this time is "miss", the reach loss (for example, "232") is indicated by pseudo-stopping the middle symbol different from the reach symbol on the effective line. After the effect symbols are pseudo-stopped, a loss notification effect is performed in which these effect symbols are stopped as they are.

On the other hand, when a variable effect pattern that develops from the normal short reach to another reach effect is set, in other words, the variable time during which the pre-reach effect, the normal short reach, and the other reach effect can be executed (first special). When the variation pattern (of the symbol) is selected, the following effects are performed. For example, when the normal short reach (see FIG. 62 (E)) is developed to the normal long reach (see FIG. 62 (G)) and a variable effect pattern for notifying the winning is set in the normal long reach, the normal short is set. At the end of the reach, a predetermined development suggestion effect that suggests the development to the normal long reach is performed, and the high-speed scrolling of the symbol row in the middle row is resumed, and the reach effect develops to the normal long reach. In this normal long reach, for example, in the central region of the first display screen 7a, an effect display is performed in which a predetermined character expects a pattern alignment. FIG. 63 (C) exemplifies a state in which the normal long reach is executed, but the illustration of the effect display that is expected to have the same pattern is omitted.

The normal long reach is the reach production with the lowest jackpot reliability next to the normal short reach among the above five types of reach effects (for example, the jackpot reliability: about 4%), and in most cases, the normal long reach. The loss notification effect (see FIG. 62 (F)) is performed in the normal long reach without developing into another reach effect, but if the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment this time is a big hit, the normal long reach In some cases, a hit notification effect (see FIG. 62 (F)) is performed. Further, when a variable effect pattern that develops from the normal long reach to another reach effect (first SP reach or SPSP reach in the third embodiment) is set, the normal long reach to the first SP reach (FIG. 62 (FIG. 62). Reach production will develop into (see H)) or SPSP reach (see FIG. 62 (K)).

Here, the 1st SP reach is a reach effect having the lowest jackpot reliability next to the normal long reach (for example, jackpot reliability: about 11%), and when developing from the normal long reach to the 1st SP reach, it is as follows. Production is performed. That is, at the end of the normal long reach, the middle row symbol row scrolls at a low speed, and after the same middle symbol as the reach symbol passes on the effective line, the high speed scrolling of the middle row symbol row is restarted and on the effective line. The reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that are pseudo-stopped move to the upper left region and the upper right region of the first display screen 7a, respectively, while being reduced while maintaining the reach state (FIG. 63 (D). )reference). Then, the first SP reach effect image is displayed in the central region of the first display screen 7a, and a predetermined effect display for expecting a big hit is performed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, when the normal short reach (see FIG. 62 (E)) develops to the above-mentioned first SP reach (see FIG. 62 (H)) without going through the normal long reach. Or, when directly developing from the normal short reach to the second SP reach (see FIG. 62 (I)) without going through the normal long reach, or from the normal short reach to the SPSP reach without going through the normal long reach (Fig. 62 (Fig. 62)). See K)) may develop directly.

Here, the second SP reach is a reach effect with a slightly higher jackpot reliability than the first SP reach (for example, jackpot reliability: about 12%), and when developing from a normal short reach to a second SP reach, it is as follows. Production is performed. That is, at the end of the normal long reach, the middle row symbol row scrolls at a low speed, and after the same middle symbol as the reach symbol passes on the effective line, the high speed scrolling of the middle row symbol row is restarted and on the effective line. The reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that are pseudo-stopped move to the upper left region and the upper right region of the first display screen 7a, respectively, while being reduced while maintaining the reach state (FIG. 63 (E). )reference). Then, the second SP reach effect image is displayed in the central region of the first display screen 7a, and a predetermined effect display for expecting a big hit is performed.

By the way, the 1st SP reach and the 2nd SP reach are displayed with the same screen configuration to expect a big hit, but the contents of these reach effects are different from each other. Specifically, in the 1st SP reach, if the own character cannot prevent the enemy character from attacking, it becomes a big hit, and conversely, if the own character cannot prevent the enemy character from attacking, it becomes a loss. On the other hand, the second SP reach is configured as a mission production, and if the character succeeds in the mission, it becomes a big hit, and conversely, if the mission fails, a production display that becomes a loss is performed.

When it develops into the 1st SP reach or the 2nd SP reach, the jackpot reliability of these reach effects is relatively low, so the loss notification effect is the hit notification effect in the hit notification effect (see FIG. 62 (J)). Easier to execute than. Therefore, when it develops into the first SP reach or the second SP reach, the player expects to develop from these SP reach to SPSP reach (see FIG. 62 (K)).

Here, the SPSP reach (see FIG. 62 (K)) is the reach effect having the highest jackpot reliability among the above five types of reach effects. In the third embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 62, when the reach directly develops into the SPSP reach immediately after the reach is established (see FIGS. 62 (D) and 62 (K)), the normal short reach and the normal long reach are performed. When developing to SPSP reach via (see FIGS. 62 (E), (G), and (K)) and when developing to SPSP reach via normal short reach and first SP reach (see FIG. 62 (E), (G), and (K)). ), (H), and (K), and when developing to SPSP reach via normal short reach and second SP reach (see FIGS. 62 (E), (I), and (K)). There is a case where the normal short reach directly develops into the SPSP reach (see FIGS. 62 (E) and 62 (K)).

Although detailed description is omitted, in the SPSP reach, the SPSP reach effect image is displayed on the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 63 (F)), and a battle effect in which the own character and the enemy character battle is executed. However, if the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment this time is "big hit", the victory effect and the hit notification effect that the own character wins over the enemy character are executed, and if it is lost, the own character is the enemy. A defeat effect and a loss notification effect that defeat the character are executed.

[About screen configuration]
FIG. 63 is a screen view illustrating the screen configuration of the first display screen 7a in the low accuracy and low base state. In the low-accuracy low-base state, as illustrated in FIG. 63 (A), the hold icon display area 9c and the icon display area 9e are formed on the first display screen 7a below the effect symbol display area 73. To.

<Hold icon display area 9c>
The hold icon display area 9c (see FIG. 63 (A)) is a display area in which a hold icon (hold display image) indicating that the first special symbol winning / failing determination is held is displayed, and is exemplified in the first embodiment. This is a display area corresponding to the first effect hold display area 9c. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20 in a situation where the special symbol winning / failing determination and the special symbol variation display cannot be started immediately, such as during a special symbol variation display or a big hit game. The right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is correct is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four).

In this way, when the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is correct is reserved, the same number of hold as the number of pending first special symbol acceptance determination indicated by the first special symbol hold indicator 43a is held in the hold icon display area 9c. The icon is displayed. FIG. 63 (A) illustrates a state in which one hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c in order to suggest that the number of holds for the first special symbol winning / failing determination is “1”. There is.

By the way, if the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c during the execution of the highly reliable reach effect such as the above-mentioned SPSP reach (see FIG. 62 (K)), the display area used for the reach effect is limited. Not only that, the display of the hold icon may reduce the appeal of the reach production. For example, when a hold icon (for example, a red hold icon) in a display mode suggesting that the jackpot reliability is relatively high due to the so-called hold look-ahead effect is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, the player's consciousness is raised. It is easy to be directed to the hold icon, and the effect of the reach effect during execution may be significantly reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the hold icon display area is displayed during the pre-reach effect described above based on FIG. 62 (C) and during the normal short reach described above based on FIG. 62 (E). While displaying the display objects (the pedestal of the hold icon in the present embodiment 3) and the hold icon (see FIGS. 63 (A) and 63 (B)) that constitute 9c, the reach effect has a higher jackpot reliability than the normal long reach. During the execution of, the display objects and the hold icons constituting the hold icon display area 9c are not displayed on the first display screen 7a (see FIGS. 63 (C) to 63 (F)).

<The icon display area 9e>
The icon display area 9e is a display area for displaying the "icon" as a fluctuation suggestion image suggesting that the first special symbol is changing. The icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (see, for example, FIG. 63 (A)), and for example, the icon is displayed at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol ends. It is erased from the icon display area 9e. However, the deletion timing of the icon is not limited to this, and the icon may be deleted during the variable display of the first special symbol. For example, the icon may be deleted at the time of SPSP reach development or during SPSP reach. You may try to erase it.

By the way, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 20 in a state where the variable display of the special symbol is not performed and the right of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is reserved, the variable display of the first special symbol is started. As a result, the icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e. On the other hand, when the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c and the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e is completed, the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. The first special symbol hit / miss determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon (hold icon displayed at the position closest to the icon display area 9e) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol hit / fail determination, the earliest hold icon shifts from the hold icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e. , Will be displayed as a new icon. In this way, the hold icon (here, the icon) shifted to the icon display area 9e is displayed larger than when it is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c (see FIG. 63 (A)). Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e than the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c.

When another hold icon different from the earliest hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, the hold icon display area 9c is accompanied by the shift of the earliest hold icon to the icon display area 9e. In, the other hold icon shifts toward the icon display area 9e. As is clear from the description so far, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the icon corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c may be displayed in the icon display area 9e. Therefore, in the following description, when the hold icon and the icon are not distinguished, they may be collectively referred to as "icon".

(Screen configuration at the start of fluctuation)
When the first special symbol hit / fail determination that was held in the low probability / low base state is executed, the variation display of the first special symbol is started, and the icon shift process is performed accordingly. Specifically, for example, when the first first special symbol winning / failing determination is executed while the two rights of the first special symbol winning / failing determination are reserved, as illustrated in FIG. 63 (A). The first hold icon of the two hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e, and the second hold icon is moved to the hold icon display area 9c. In, shift processing is performed to shift to the display position where the first hold icon was displayed. In addition, high-speed scrolling of the three symbol rows is started with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 63 (A)).

Immediately after the high-speed scrolling of these three symbol rows is started, a part of the effect symbols of each of the three symbol rows is displayed on the first display screen 7a in the effect symbol display area 7b, and these three symbol rows are displayed. A predetermined background image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a so that a part of the effect symbols are superimposed and displayed (see FIG. 63 (A)). For example, when the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode described later, the background image dedicated to the fourth normal mode (selected music effect image: see FIG. 65) is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a, and the background image thereof. The effect mode name "fourth normal mode" corresponding to is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a. Then, during high-speed scrolling of the three symbol rows, the effect symbols constituting the three symbol rows are displayed semi-transparently, so that the player responds to the effect mode through the effect symbols constituting the three symbol rows. It is possible to visually recognize the background image.

In FIG. 63A, a background image dedicated to the fourth normal mode is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a, and the effect mode name "fourth normal mode" is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a. Although the displayed state is illustrated, when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode, the background image dedicated to the first normal mode is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a, and the "first normal mode" is displayed. The effect mode name "mode" is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a (see, for example, FIGS. 65, 68, and 69). Further, when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, the background image dedicated to the second normal mode is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a, and the effect mode name "second normal mode" is first. It is displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 7a (see, for example, FIGS. 65 and 70). Further, when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, the background image dedicated to the third normal mode is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a, and the effect mode name "third normal mode" is first. It is displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 7a (see, for example, FIGS. 65 and 71 to 73).

(Screen configuration during normal short reach)
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 63, after the high-speed scrolling of the three symbol rows is started, the scroll speed of each symbol row gradually decreases, and the effect symbols common to the left symbol and the right symbol stop and reach. Is established, and it may develop into a normal short reach (see FIG. 62 (E)). In this way, when the normal short reach is developed, the background image displayed on the first display screen 7a before the reach is established is continuously displayed, and with this background image displayed, the normal short reach is achieved. The predetermined effect display is performed (see FIG. 63 (B)).

In the third embodiment, a case where the background image displayed during the normal short reach is continuously displayed until the end of the normal short reach will be described as an example, but from the normal short reach to another reach effect. If it develops, the background image may be changed to another effect image in the middle of the normal short reach. For example, when the reach effect develops from the normal short reach to the normal long reach (see FIG. 62 (G)), the background image is changed to a long suggestion image suggesting the normal long reach in the middle of the normal short reach. When the reach effect develops from the normal short reach to the first SP reach (see FIG. 62 (H)), the background image is changed to the first SP suggestion image suggesting the first SP reach in the middle of the normal short reach, and the background image is changed to normal. When the reach effect develops from the short reach to the second SP reach (see FIG. 62 (I)), the background image is changed to the second SP suggestion image suggesting the second SP reach in the middle of the normal short reach. Take as an example.

(Screen configuration during normal long reach)
On the other hand, during the normal long reach developed from the normal short reach, the reach symbols (for example, the left 3 symbols and the right 3 symbols) are on the effective line in the effect symbol display area 7b as illustrated in FIG. 63 (C). In the pseudo-stopped state, a predetermined normal long reach effect image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a. As a result, during the normal long reach, an effect display is performed in which a predetermined character expects the symbols to be aligned in the central region of the first display screen 7a.

In the third embodiment, the background image displayed before the reach is established (during the pre-reach production) is continuously displayed during the normal short reach, but the jackpot reliability is higher than that of the normal short reach. During the reach effect of, a dedicated reach effect image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a. In this way, when a dedicated reach effect image is displayed for each reach effect, if a hold icon or a display object that constitutes the hold icon display area 9c, which is not directly related to the current variation effect, is displayed, the reach effect image is displayed. As a result, the visibility of each reach effect may be reduced. Therefore, in the third embodiment, during the normal long reach, the first SP reach, the second SP reach, and the SPSP reach, the display objects constituting the hold icon and hold icon display area 9c (here, of each hold icon). The pedestal) is not displayed (see FIGS. 63 (C) to 63 (F)).

(Screen configuration during the 1st SP reach)
Subsequently, during the first SP reach, as illustrated in FIG. 63 (D), the left symbol constituting the reach symbol is displayed in a small pseudo-stop display in the upper left region of the first display screen 7a, and the reach symbol is displayed. A predetermined first SP reach effect image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a in a state where the constituent right symbol is displayed in a small pseudo-stop display in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a.

(Screen configuration during the 2nd SP reach)
Further, during the second SP reach, as illustrated in FIG. 63 (E), the left symbol constituting the reach symbol is displayed in a small pseudo-stop display in the upper left region of the first display screen 7a, and the reach symbol is configured. A predetermined second SP reach effect image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a in a state where the right symbol to be displayed is displayed in a small pseudo-stop display in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a.

(Screen configuration during SPSP reach)
Further, during SPSP reach, as illustrated in FIG. 63 (F), the left symbol constituting the reach symbol is displayed in a small pseudo stop in the upper left region of the first display screen 7a, and the reach symbol is configured. A predetermined SPSP reach effect image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a in a state where the right symbol is displayed in a small pseudo-stop display in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a.

(About the composition of the production design)
Although not shown in FIG. 63, in the third embodiment, the effect is controlled in any of the first normal mode to the third normal mode except when the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode. When), the effect symbol displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b is a character image representing a predetermined person with respect to identification information (numbers in the present embodiment) for distinguishing the effect symbol from other effect symbols. (See FIGS. 66 to 73). In this embodiment, a case where the identification information is a number will be described as an example, but the identification information is not limited to a number as long as the effect symbol can be distinguished from another effect symbol, for example, an alphabet. Or a symbol or the like.

On the other hand, if a character image is added to the reach symbols displayed small in the upper left region and the upper right region of the first display screen 7a, the visibility of the small reach symbols can be reduced or the reach effect can be reduced. There is a possibility that the interest will be reduced. Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are displayed in a small pseudo-stop display in the upper left region and the upper right region of the first display screen 7a, the reach without the character image is added. The design is to be displayed.

[Changes in production mode]
FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various effect modes in the low accuracy and low base state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the variation effect is performed by using the first display screen 7a, the speaker 67, the board lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, etc. As the normal effect mode (normal effect mode) according to the above, four types of normal effect modes are prepared: a first normal mode, a second normal mode, a third normal mode, and a fourth normal mode (see FIG. 64). ..

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the number of fluctuations, which is the number of times the first special symbol and the variation display (symbol variation) of the first special symbol and the effect symbol are performed, is counted by the effect control microcomputer 91. When the counted number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), one normal effect mode changes to another normal effect mode. For example, when the number of fluctuations of the symbol variation performed in the first normal mode reaches a predetermined number, the first normal mode changes to the second normal mode, the third normal mode, or the fourth normal mode. Further, for example, when the number of fluctuations of the symbol variation performed in the second normal mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the second normal mode changes to the first normal mode, the third normal mode, or the fourth normal mode. Further, for example, when the number of fluctuations of the symbol variation performed in the third normal mode reaches a predetermined number, the third normal mode changes to the first normal mode, the second normal mode, or the fourth normal mode. Further, for example, when the number of fluctuations of the symbol variation performed in the fourth normal mode reaches a predetermined number, the fourth normal mode changes to the first normal mode, the second normal mode, or the third normal mode.

The normal effect mode of the transition destination is determined by, for example, an effect lottery by the effect control microcomputer 91. The ROM of the sub-control board 90 contains a first normal mode / transition destination selection table that is referred to when selecting the normal effect mode of the transition destination of the first normal mode, and a normal effect of the transition destination of the second normal mode. The second normal mode / transition destination selection table referred to when selecting a mode, and the third normal mode / transition destination selection table referred to when selecting the normal effect mode of the transition destination of the third normal mode. And the fourth normal mode / transition destination selection table referred to when selecting the normal effect mode of the transition destination of the fourth normal mode are stored. In these migration destination selection tables, different random numbers are associated with the three normal effect modes that can be migration destinations.

For example, when the normal effect mode, which is the transition destination of the first normal mode, is selected, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the following processing. That is, when the number of fluctuations of the symbol variation performed in the first normal mode reaches a predetermined number, the effect control microcomputer 91 changes the number of fluctuations with respect to the transition destination selection random number that is appropriately updated by the random number update process on the sub-control board 90. Acquires a random number value when the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times as a transfer destination selection random number. On the other hand, in the first normal mode / transition destination selection table, different random number values are associated with each of the second normal mode, the third normal mode, and the third normal mode, and the effect control is performed. The microcomputer 91 reads out one normal effect mode to which a random number value matching the acquired migration destination selection random number is associated with the first normal mode / migration destination selection table, and thereby becomes the migration destination normal effect mode. Select.

Although the combination of the normal effect modes specified in the migration destination selection table and the random number value associated with each normal effect mode are different, the second normal mode, the third normal mode, or the fourth normal mode can be selected. When shifting to another normal effect mode, it is possible to select the normal effect mode to be the transition destination by performing the same processing.

By the way, when the loss notification effect is executed in the reach effect having a relatively high jackpot reliability such as the 1st SP reach, the 2nd SP reach, and the SPSP reach, the player feels unpleasant that the hit notification effect is not executed. Can not be switched well, and as a result, the game may be stopped.

In order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, when the loss notification effect is executed in the first SP reach, the second SP reach, and the SPSP reach, the number of fluctuations is predetermined. Regardless of whether or not the number of times has been reached, the normal effect mode immediately before the development of these reach effects is changed to another normal effect mode from the next symbol variation of the symbol changes in which these reach effects are executed. It is said. For example, during the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol, the effect is executed in the second normal mode during the pre-reach effect or the normal short reach, and the second SP reach developed from the normal short reach is lost. When the notification effect is executed, an effect lottery using the above-mentioned transition destination selection random number and the second normal mode / transition destination selection table is executed, and based on the result of the effect lottery, the transfer destination normal effect is executed. Select a mode. Then, the second normal mode is changed to the normal effect mode selected by the effect lottery with the start of the next symbol change of the symbol change in which the loss notification effect is executed in the second SP reach.

In this way, when the loss notification effect is executed in the reach effect with relatively high jackpot reliability, by changing the normal effect mode to another normal effect mode, the hit notification effect is compared with the normal short reach and the like. Although the 1st SP reach, the 2nd SP reach, and the SPSP reach are executed, the hit notification effect is not executed and the player's feelings are changed, and as a result, the player's feelings are changed. It is possible to contribute to the reduction of discomfort.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, when the jackpot reliability is relatively high, that is, when the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment in the low probability / low base state is "big hit" or "missing". However, when the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol with a relatively long fluctuation time is selected and the first special symbol is variablely displayed in the selected fluctuation pattern, the above-mentioned four types of normal symbols are displayed. One of the normal production modes of the production mode may shift to another production mode. That is, one of the normal production modes shifts to the chance mode, which is a production mode with a higher jackpot reliability than the normal production mode, or shifts to the super hot mode, which has a higher jackpot reliability than the chance mode. , It may shift to the super hot mode via the chance mode.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, when the right of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is reserved, it is determined in advance whether or not it is a big hit before the first special symbol winning / failing determination is executed. The game control microcomputer 81 may execute a pre-determination process for specifying a variation pattern of the first special symbol that is selected when the first special symbol hit / fail determination is actually executed. Then, based on this pre-judgment result, the normal effect mode shifts to the chance mode or the normal effect mode shifts to the intense hot mode before the first special symbol hit / fail judgment that is the target of the pre-judgment process is executed. In some cases, the normal production mode may shift to the super hot mode via the chance mode. In addition, the normal effect mode shifts to the chance mode before the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, which is the target of the pre-judgment process, is executed, and the first is performed in response to the execution of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment. During the variable display of the special symbol, the chance mode may shift to the super hot mode.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the normal production mode may shift to the chance mode or the intense hot mode. Therefore, by performing the mode transition production as described above, the player's expectation for the jackpot It is possible to improve the effect and obtain a high effect.

However, in the mode transition effect as described above, a fluctuation pattern in which the determination result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" and the fluctuation time is relatively short is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. In some cases, it is difficult to execute. For this reason, if the player cannot easily get a big hit and only the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol whose fluctuation time is relatively short is selected for a long period of time, the reach effect with high reliability will not be executed. Coupled with this, it is conceivable that the interest will gradually decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, by shifting the effect mode between the normal effect modes, the background image on which the effect symbols are superimposed and displayed can be changed, the display mode of the effect symbols can be changed, and the effect can be produced. A composite effect that changes the variation mode of the symbol, performs a dialogue effect using a similar image that is an effect image similar to the character image that constitutes the effect symbol, or combines numbers and a character image to form an effect symbol. By doing so, it is decided to suppress the above-mentioned decline in interest.

[Characteristics of each normal production mode]
Next, the features of each normal effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 65. Here, FIG. 65 is a list illustrating the features of each normal effect mode. As described above based on FIG. 64, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the first normal mode is a normal effect mode related to the effect performed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accuracy and low base state. , A second normal mode, a third normal mode, and a fourth normal mode are prepared.

<Music selection>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, when the production is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the music selection screen described later is displayed, and the player performs a predetermined operation on the music selection screen to perform the first operation. It is possible to arbitrarily select a musical piece to be played using the display screen 7a, the speaker 67, or the like (see FIG. 65). On the other hand, in the three normal production modes of the first normal mode to the third normal mode, the above-mentioned music selection screen is not selected, and it is impossible for the player to arbitrarily select a music (see FIG. 65). ).

<Background image>
As illustrated in FIG. 65, when the effect is controlled in the first normal effect mode, the background image dedicated to the first normal mode, which is not displayed in the other normal effect modes, is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and the second display screen 7a is displayed. When the effect is controlled in the normal mode, the background image dedicated to the second normal mode, which is not displayed in the other normal effect modes, is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, the effect is controlled. A background image dedicated to the third normal mode, which is not displayed in the other normal effect modes, is displayed on the first display screen 7a.

On the other hand, when the production is controlled in the fourth normal mode, unlike when the production is controlled in the other normal production modes, the pachinko gaming machine 1 selects one of a plurality of reproducible songs. The music selection screen is displayed on the third display screen 72a (see FIG. 1), and the player uses the cross key described above in the second embodiment and the first effect button 63a (see FIG. 1). By performing the operation, it is possible to select one of the songs. When any of the songs is selected by a predetermined operation while the production is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the selected music production image (movie of the selected music) which is the production image related to the selected music is the first. It is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 65).

When the music is not selected by the player, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects one of the reproducible music by the production lottery, and the music production image (video of the music) which is the production image related to the selected music. ) Is displayed on the first display screen 7a via the image control board 100. Then, when the display of the music production image selected by the production lottery ends, if the music player has not selected the music, the production lottery is executed again, and the music production image related to the newly selected music is executed. Is displayed on the first display screen 7a. Further, on the above-mentioned music selection screen, it is possible to select random playback separately from any of the plurality of music, and when the player selects this random playback, the music production image displayed on the first display screen 7a is displayed. It will change automatically.

<BGM>
Further, as illustrated in FIG. 65, when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode, the first normal mode dedicated BGM corresponding to the first normal mode dedicated background image is output from the speaker 67, and the second normal mode dedicated BGM is output. When the effect is controlled in the mode, the BGM dedicated to the second normal mode corresponding to the background image dedicated to the second normal mode is output from the speaker 67, and when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, the third normal mode The third normal mode dedicated BGM corresponding to the dedicated background image is output from the speaker 67.

On the other hand, when the production is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the selected music production image related to the selected music selected by the player or the music production image related to the music automatically selected by the above production lottery is displayed. It is displayed on the first display screen 7a. Therefore, when the production is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the arbitrarily or automatically selected selected music corresponding to the music production image displayed on the first display screen 7a is the fourth normal mode. It is output from the speaker 67 as a dedicated BGM (see FIG. 65).

<Hold / Normal display mode of the icon>
By the way, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c (see FIG. 63 (A)) is usually displayed as a hold icon in a normal display mode that does not suggest how much the jackpot reliability is. When the corresponding first special symbol hit / fail determination is executed, the hold icon in this normal display mode moves to the icon display area 9e and is displayed as the icon.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is suspended based on the result of the above-mentioned pre-determination process performed in response to the suspension of the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is correct in the low accuracy and low base state. An icon change effect may be performed in which the hold icon in the normal display mode displayed in the icon display area 9c is changed to the hold icon in the special display mode suggesting how high the jackpot reliability is. When this icon change effect is performed, the hold icon in the normal display mode (for example, the white hold icon) suggests the jackpot reliability such as blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow as the hold icon in the special display mode. Changes to a colored hold icon. The colors suggesting the jackpot reliability illustrated here are arranged in order from the one with the lowest jackpot reliability to the one with the highest jackpot reliability. In Example 3, the jackpot reliability of the blue hold icon is set to about 1%, and the green color is green. The jackpot reliability of the hold icon is set to about 10%, the jackpot reliability of the red hold icon is set to about 40%, the jackpot reliability of the golden hold icon is set to about 65%, and the rainbow-colored hold The jackpot reliability of the icon is set to 100%.

Up to this point, the icon change effect in which the display color changes only once when the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c has been described, but in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, other icon change effects have been described. May be done. That is, for example, when a white hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, it changes to a blue hold icon and then to a green hold icon. In some cases, an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of the hold icon changes a plurality of times. Further, when the white hold icon shifted from the hold icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e is displayed as the icon, an icon change effect in which the display color changes may be performed.

Further, the display color of the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c changes, and then the display color changes when the hold icon shifts to the icon display area 9e and is displayed as the icon. In some cases, an icon change effect in which the display color of the icon changes is performed in both the hold icon display area 9c and the icon display area 9e. In addition, an icon change effect that displays the hold icon in a display color other than white (for example, blue) from the beginning, and an icon change effect that changes the display color of the hold icon whose initial color is other than white to a higher display color. May be done.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c may be shifted to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon as it is. Then, when the hold icon and the icon are not distinguished, they may be collectively referred to as "icon".

Up to this point, the hold icon and the icon change effect for the icon have been described, but when this icon change effect is not performed, the following problems may occur. That is, as described above, by shifting the normal effect mode to another normal effect mode, the background image displayed on the first display screen 7a and the BGM output from the speaker 67 change, which is a big hit. Even if it is difficult to produce the expected effect, the effect will change, which can contribute to suppressing the decline in interest.

On the other hand, when the icon change effect is not performed, the effect is controlled in the first normal mode, the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, and the effect is controlled in the third normal mode. In a configuration such as displaying a hold icon or the icon in the normal display mode in which the display mode is completely the same when the display mode is set and when the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the hold icon and the icon are related. , It is considered that there is little change due to the transition of the production mode, and the suppression of the decline in interest is not sufficient.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a hold icon having a different shape and size and the icon are displayed depending on the four types of normal production modes in order to suppress the deterioration of the interest. (See FIG. 65). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 65, when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode, the hold icon in the normal display mode or the icon dedicated to the first normal mode (for example, a hexagonal icon) is used as the icon. When the hold icon or the icon (see FIG. 68 (A)) is displayed and the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, the hold icon in the normal display mode or the icon is a second normal mode dedicated icon (for example, A diamond-shaped hold icon or the icon concerned: see FIG. 70 (A)) is displayed. Further, when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, the hold icon in the normal display mode or the icon dedicated to the third normal mode (for example, the hold icon in the inverted triangle or the icon: see FIG. 71 (A)). ) Is displayed, and when the production is controlled in the 4th normal mode, as the hold icon or the icon in the normal display mode, the icon dedicated to the 4th normal mode (for example, the hold icon in the shape of a note or the icon: FIG. 66 (A)) is displayed.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to change the hold icon and the normal display mode of the icon by shifting the normal effect mode to another effect mode without performing the icon change effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively contribute to the suppression of the decrease in the interest by the synergistic effect with the icon change effect.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the hold icon and the normal display mode of the icon are different for each normal effect mode, while the hold icon and the special display mode of the icon (after the icon change effect is performed). The hold icon and the display mode of the icon) are shared between the normal production modes. For example, when the first normal mode and the fourth normal mode are compared, in the first normal mode, a hexagonal icon (see FIG. 68 (A)) is displayed as an icon of the normal display mode, whereas it is displayed. In the fourth normal mode, a musical note-shaped icon (see FIG. 66 (A)) is displayed as an icon of the normal display mode, and when the two icons are compared, the normal display modes are different from each other. On the other hand, in the first normal mode, the hexagonal icon changes to a circular icon (a color suggesting jackpot reliability) (see FIG. 68 (A)) when the icon change effect is performed. 4 In the normal mode, when the icon change effect is performed, the icon in the shape of a note changes to a circular icon (a color suggesting jackpot reliability) (see FIGS. 66 (H) and (I)). When the icons are compared, the special display modes are common to each other. Here, the first normal mode and the fourth normal mode have been compared and described, but the same can be said when a plurality of other normal effect modes are compared.

For example, if the display mode (special display mode) of the icon after the icon change effect is easily adopted to be different for each normal effect mode, the display color, shape, size, etc. of the icon will be the same as the normal effect mode. It will differ depending on the type, and there may be a problem that it becomes difficult to recognize the jackpot reliability based on the display mode of the icon after the icon change effect.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the display mode (special display mode) of the icon after the icon change is common among the plurality of normal effect modes (the shape and size are the same). Therefore, it is possible to recognize the jackpot reliability based only on the display color (blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow color) of the icon after the icon change effect, and it is effective that the above problems occur. It is possible to suppress it.

In the third embodiment, when the icons of the normal display modes displayed in each normal effect mode are compared, a case where the shapes and sizes are different from each other but the display colors are common will be described as an example. In another embodiment, in addition to the shape and size, display colors may be different from each other. Further, in the third embodiment, the special display mode (here, the shape and size) of the icon after the icon change effect is common among the plurality of normal effect modes, and the jackpot is based only on the display color of the icon. A configuration that can recognize the reliability is adopted, but in other embodiments, the special display mode (here, the shape and size) of the icon after the icon change is different among the plurality of normal production modes. The configuration of may be adopted. In this case, even if the special display mode (here, shape and size) of the icon after the icon change is different, if the display color is the same, the jackpot reliability may be the same. Alternatively, even if the display color is the same, if the shape and size are different, the jackpot reliability may be different.

<Design composition>
As illustrated in FIG. 65, in the three normal effect modes of the first normal mode to the third normal mode and the fourth normal mode, the effect symbol displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3). The configurations are different from each other. Specifically, when the effect is controlled in any of the normal effect modes of the first normal mode to the third normal mode, a number for distinguishing the effect symbol from other effect symbols and a number added to the number. An effect symbol composed of the character image (an example of a decorative image) is displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIGS. 68 to 73). On the other hand, when the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the effect symbol composed of only the numbers to which the character image is not added is displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIGS. 66 and 67).

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, as described above based on FIG. 65, the selected music production image related to the music selected by the player and the music production image related to the automatically selected music are displayed. It is displayed as a background image on the first display screen 7a. For this reason, when a production pattern composed of numbers and character images is superimposed and displayed on the music production image, the visibility of the music production image is significantly reduced, and the interest of the production for reproducing the music is lowered more than necessary. There is a possibility that it will end up.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, as described above, when the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the number to which the character image is not added is added. The effect symbol composed of only is displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b.

When comparing the three types of normal effect modes, the first normal mode to the third normal mode, these normal effect modes are common in that the effect symbol is composed of numbers and character images. However, these normal effect modes are different in that the display mode of the character image constituting the effect symbol differs depending on the effect mode.

Specifically, the effect symbol having the number "1" is configured to have the character image of the character A, and the effect symbol having the number "2" is configured to have the character image of the character B, and is a number. The effect symbol having the character "3" is composed of the character image of the character C, and the effect symbol having the number "4" is composed of the character image of the character D and has the number "5". The effect symbol is configured to have a character image of the character E, the effect symbol having the number "6" is configured to have the character image of the character F, and the effect symbol having the number "7" is the character G. The effect symbol having the character image and having the number "8" is configured to have the character image of the character H, and the effect symbol having the number "9" has the character image of the character I. The first normal mode to the third in that the correspondence between the numbers constituting the effect design and the type of character represented by the character image added to the numbers is fixed. The normal mode is common.

On the other hand, for example, when comparing each effect symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "2 symbol") having the number "2" displayed in the first normal mode to the third normal mode, it is as follows. There are some differences. That is, the two symbols displayed when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode are configured to have a character image representing the upper body of the character B as illustrated in FIG. 68 (A). , The number "2" is added to the lower right of the character image. On the other hand, the two symbols displayed when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode are character images representing the upper body of the character B, as illustrated in FIG. 70 (C), and are the first. It is composed of a character image representing a character B larger than the character image constituting the two symbols (see FIG. 68 (A)) displayed when the effect is controlled in the normal mode, and the character image. The number "2" is added to the lower right of. Further, the two symbols displayed when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode are configured to have a character image representing the character B wearing a dress, as illustrated in FIG. 71 (H). At the same time, the number "2" is added to the lower center of the character image.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, even if the character images represent the same character, the display modes of the character images differ from each other depending on the effect mode.

<Variation mode>
As illustrated in FIG. 65, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment has a feature that the variation mode of the effect symbol is different for each normal effect mode.

(1st normal mode)
Specifically, when the game is controlled in the first normal mode, the numbers "1" to "9" are continuous in the horizontal direction from left to right in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3). Each symbol row is displayed in three columns in the vertical direction so that a part of the symbol rows of the effect symbols marked with the above is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 68 (A)). Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the scroll display of the three symbol rows is started so that these symbol rows scroll from right to left (for example, FIG. 68 (B). )reference). As described above, the variation mode of the effect symbol when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode is left scrolling (see FIG. 65).

As is clear from the notation of FIG. 68 (A), the effect symbols constituting the symbol string in the lower row are pseudo-stopped in the lower left area in the effect symbol display area 7b, and then the main stop is performed, and the symbol string in the middle row is stopped. The constituent effect symbols make a pseudo stop in the central area in the effect symbol display area 7b and then make a main stop, and the effect symbols constituting the upper row of symbols make a pseudo stop in the upper right area in the effect symbol display area 7b. This stop.

(Second normal mode)
On the other hand, when the game is controlled in the second normal mode, the numbers "1" to "9" are continuously written in the vertical direction from the bottom to the top in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3). Each symbol row is displayed in three rows in the horizontal direction so that a part of the symbol rows of the effect symbols is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 70 (A)). Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the scroll display of the three symbol rows is started so that these symbol rows scroll from top to bottom (for example, FIG. 70 (B). )reference). As described above, the variation mode of the effect symbol when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode is scrolling down (see FIG. 65).

As is clear from the notation of FIG. 70 (A), the effect symbols constituting the symbol string in the left column are pseudo-stopped in the left area in the effect symbol display area 7b, and then the main stop is performed, and the symbol string in the middle row is stopped. The effect symbols constituting the effect symbol stop in the central area in the effect symbol display area 7b and then stop, and the effect symbols constituting the symbol string in the right column are pseudo-stopped in the right side area in the effect symbol display area 7b. This will stop from.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 70, when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, the character image constituting the effect symbol is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and subsequently corresponds to the character image. The numbers may be displayed on the first display screen 7a, and then a composite effect may be performed in which the character image and the numbers are combined to complete one effect symbol (see FIGS. 70 (F) to 70 (H)). .. In FIGS. 70 (F) to 70 (H), a character image representing the character H is displayed in the right side area of the first display screen 7a, and subsequently, the number “8” is displayed in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a. It is illustrated how these character images and the number "8" are displayed and moved to the left side region of the first display screen 7a and combined to complete the left eight symbols.

(Third normal mode)
When the game is controlled in the third normal mode, three effect symbols having any number of "1" to "9" are arranged in the horizontal direction in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3). It is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 71 (A)). Then, as the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol rotate clockwise with the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the axial direction, respectively. (See, for example, FIGS. 71 (B)-(D)). Then, by rotating each effect symbol once, the effect symbol having the number added by "1" is displayed. In FIGS. 71 (B) to 71 (D), the left 4 symbols are rotated once clockwise to display the left 5 symbols, the middle 3 symbols are rotated once clockwise to display the middle 4 symbols, and the right 1 is displayed. It is illustrated that the symbol is rotated once clockwise and the two symbols on the right are displayed. As described above, the variation mode of the effect symbol when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode is rotation (clockwise rotation with the vertical direction as the axial direction) (see FIG. 65).

As is clear from the notation of FIGS. 71 to 73, the rotation of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is performed in a state where the character image is not added, and the effect symbol composed of only numbers is simulated. When stopping, a character image corresponding to the number is added. For example, in FIGS. 71 (E) to 71 (F), a character image representing a character H moving from above the number “8” is combined with the number “8” when the left eight symbols are pseudo-stopped. An example shows that a composite effect is performed in which the left eight symbols composed of the character image of the character H and the number "8" are completed.

(4th normal mode)
On the other hand, when the game is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the numbers "1" to "9" are continuously written in the vertical direction from the bottom to the top in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3). Each symbol row is displayed in three rows in the horizontal direction so that a part of the symbol rows of the effect symbols is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 66 (A)). Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the scroll display of the three symbol rows is started so that these symbol rows scroll from top to bottom (for example, FIG. 66 (B). )reference). As described above, the variation mode of the effect symbol when the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode is scrolling down (see FIG. 65).

In the third embodiment, the variation mode of the effect symbol in the fourth normal mode is common to the variation mode of the effect symbol in the second normal mode in that it scrolls down, but it is displayed during the fourth normal mode. The effect symbols to be produced are different from the effect symbols displayed in the second normal mode in that each effect symbol does not have a character image (see FIGS. 66, 67 and 70).

In the configuration in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol move (scroll) on the first display screen 7a, the effect symbol is displayed as compared with the case where the effect symbol rotates on its axis as in the third normal mode, for example. The area tends to be wide. Therefore, if the above configuration is adopted for the fourth normal mode in which the selected music production image is displayed, the visibility of the selected music production image tends to decrease.

Therefore, in another embodiment, when the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the effect symbol in the third normal mode in the third embodiment is the effect symbol, except that the effect symbol has a character image. A configuration common to the variation mode (rotation) may be adopted. In addition, an effect display is performed such that the effect symbol composed of only numbers moves from the back to the front of the first display screen 7a, and when the effect symbol moves to a predetermined position, it is deleted from the first display screen 7a. , The effect symbol composed of the numbers obtained by adding "1" to the numbers that made up the erased effect symbols moves in the same way, so that the effect symbols are in the order of 1 symbol, 2 symbols, and 3 symbols. Another configuration may be adopted, such as changing the effect symbol in the depth direction of the first display screen 7a, such as changing with.

<Common character dialogue production>
As illustrated in FIG. 65, when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode or the third normal mode, a similar character image (similar image) showing a character common to the character indicated by the character image constituting the effect symbol. An example) is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and a common character dialogue effect may be performed in which the appearance of the character indicated by the similar character image emitting dialogue is expressed by using the first display screen 7a and the speaker 67 (1st display screen 7a). 68-69, 72-73). The details of this common character dialogue effect will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 68 to 69 and 72 to 73.

In the third embodiment, the above-mentioned common character dialogue effect is performed when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode or the third normal mode, and in the second normal mode or the fourth normal mode. When the effect is controlled, the above-mentioned common character dialogue effect is not executed (see FIG. 65).

When such a configuration is adopted, the effect mode is shifted from the second normal mode (or the fourth normal mode) to the first normal mode (or the third normal mode), so that the effect mode is performed before the transition. There is no common character dialogue effect, and as a result, it is possible to generate an effective effect change.

<Synthetic production>
As illustrated in FIG. 65, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode or the third normal mode, the character image and the number are displayed on the first display screen 7a. A composite effect may be executed in which the images are displayed individually and then combined and displayed as an effect image (see FIGS. 70 and 71). In the third embodiment, such a composite effect is executed when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode or the third normal mode, and in the first normal mode or the fourth normal mode. When the effect is controlled, the above-mentioned composite effect is not executed (see FIG. 65).

When such a configuration is adopted, the effect mode is shifted from the first normal mode (or the fourth normal mode) to the second normal mode (or the third normal mode), so that the effect mode is performed before the transition. It is possible to produce an effective effect change as a result of the fact that no synthetic effect is performed.

[Specific example of production in the 4th normal mode]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67, a specific example of the effect performed when the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accuracy and low base state. explain. Here, FIGS. 66 and 67 are screen views illustrating the effect in the fourth normal mode, and here, as a variation pattern of the first special symbol in the low accuracy and low base state, a normal short reach (FIG. 62 (E). ) Is directly developed from (see)), and the effect executed when the fluctuation pattern in which the loss notification effect is to be performed is selected in the SPSP reach (see FIG. 62 (K)) will be described.

FIG. 66A shows a first special corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e in a state where one hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a. In order to notify that the judgment result of the symbol hit / miss judgment is "missing", the production symbol showing the disparity of "438" was stopped and displayed as the lost symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. The state is illustrated. Here, since the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the current effect mode name "fourth effect mode" is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, and FIG. 66 (A) shows. However, the selected music production image is displayed as the background image of the production design in the entire area of the first display screen 7a. Further, since the icon change effect is not performed, one hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c and the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e are both in the shape of musical notes. It is displayed as an icon in the normal display mode.

As described above, when a predetermined fixed time (0.6 seconds in the third embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. The first special symbol hit / fail determination corresponding to the hold icon (here, the hold icon in the shape of a musical note) is executed. Then, the determination result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing", and as the variation pattern of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation effect pattern that directly develops from the normal reach to the SPSP reach is used for the effect control. When selected by the microcomputer 91, the following effects are performed.

That is, the most displayed in the hold icon display area 9c as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol hit / fail determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon. The previous hold icon shifts to the icon display area 9e, and scroll display of the three symbol columns is started (see FIGS. 66A and 66B). When a predetermined time elapses after the scroll display of these three symbol rows is started, for example, a step-up notice effect image (SU notice effect image) is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a, and the SU notice effect image is displayed. There is a case where a notice effect called SU notice that changes the display mode of is stepwise is executed. In this SU notice, the jackpot reliability is suggested by the display color of the SU notice effect image and the stage to which the display mode of the SU notice effect image changes.

Following the above SU notice, a pseudo-continuous production may be executed. Here, the pseudo continuous effect means that the effect symbol displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b is varied and displayed a plurality of times during the variable display of one special symbol (here, the first special symbol). It is a pretending production. Regarding this pseudo continuous effect, the following effect display is performed.

That is, the scroll speed of the symbol row in the left column decreases and the left symbol (for example, 6 symbols) pseudo-stops, and then the scroll speed of the symbol row in the right column decreases (with the left symbol that pseudo-stops first). The right symbol (for example, 4 symbols) is pseudo-stopped, and then the scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row is reduced, and 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol that notifies the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (FIG. 66). (D)).

In this way, when seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row after the effect symbols that are different from each other as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-second variation effect following the pseudo-first variation effect is started. .. Specifically, after the character "x2" suggesting the start of the pseudo-second variation effect is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the character "x2" is displayed in the first display. It is displayed small in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and accordingly, the scroll display of the three symbol strings is restarted in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIGS. 66 (D) and (E)). When the pseudo second variation effect is being performed, for example, a SU notice may be executed as in the case of the pseudo first station variation effect (see FIG. 66 (F)).

As described above, when the SU notice is executed during the pseudo-second variation effect, the second pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the first special symbol is executed (see FIG. 66 (G)). ). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 66 (G), the scroll speed of the symbol row in the left column is reduced, the left symbol (for example, two symbols) is pseudo-stopped, and then the symbol row in the right column is displayed. The scroll speed is reduced and the right symbol (for example, 5 symbols) is pseudo-stopped, and then the scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row is reduced and 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol.

When the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed during the variation display of the first special symbol, the pseudo-third consecutive variation effect following the pseudo-second variation effect is started. Specifically, after the character "x3" suggesting the start of the pseudo-third series of variation effects is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the character "x3" is displayed in the first display. It is displayed small in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and accordingly, the scroll display of the three symbol strings is restarted in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIGS. 66 (G) and 66 (H)).

Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the pseudo-third consecutive variation effect is started in this way, the scroll speed of the symbol row in the left column decreases, the left symbol (for example, three symbols) is pseudo-stopped, and then. , The scroll speed of the symbol row in the right column is reduced (same as the symbol on the left), the right symbol (here, 3 symbols) is pseudo-stopped, and the reach is established (see FIG. 66 (I)).

In this case, the case where the "pre-reach pseudo-ream" is executed, in which the scroll display of each symbol string is temporarily interrupted and then restarted before the reach is established, has been described as an example. In some cases, a "post-reach pseudo-ream" is executed in which the scroll display is temporarily interrupted and then resumed. In addition, both the pre-reach pseudo-reach and the post-reach pseudo-reach may be executed.

In the third embodiment, a case will be described in which a pseudo-continuous effect is executed in which the scroll display of the symbol string is temporarily interrupted and then restarted. However, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the scroll display of the symbol string is interrupted / restarted. It may not be accompanied by. That is, in the pseudo continuous effect, the effect symbol is not displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b during the variable display of the first special symbol, and in this non-display state, the central area of the first display screen 7a is displayed. For example, a suggestion image suggesting the execution of a pseudo-continuous effect such as "NEXT" is displayed to make it appear that the effect symbol is varied and displayed multiple times during one variable display of the first special symbol. May be good. When a pseudo-ream effect that does not use such a pseudo-ream symbol (7 symbols that are pseudo-stopped in the middle row in the third embodiment) is executed, the non-display state is canceled immediately after the display of the suggestion image is completed. By restarting the scroll display of the symbol sequence, it is possible to make it appear as if the effect symbol is variablely displayed a plurality of times during one special symbol variable display.

Returning to the description of the third embodiment, as described above, when the same effect symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol is pseudo-stopped and the reach is established, the normal short reach (see FIG. 62 (E)) is executed (see FIG. 62 (E)). See FIG. 67 (A)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 67 (A), the scroll speed of the middle row of symbols gradually decreases after the reach is established, and the reach symbols (here, the left 3 symbols and the right 3 symbols) are used. An effect display is performed to show how the same middle symbol (here, the middle 3 symbols) approaches the effective line defined by the reach symbol.

Here, when developing from normal reach to SPSP reach, the following effect display is performed. That is, when the scroll display of the symbol row in the middle row is performed, the same middle symbol (3 symbols in this case) as the reach symbol passes on the effective line, and the scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row is accompanied by this. Will rise, making it difficult to identify the middle symbol, and a development effect will be performed that suggests that it will develop into SPSP reach (see FIG. 67 (B)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 67 (B), one rotation clockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction in the process of moving to the upper left region of the first display screen 7a while the three symbols on the left are reduced. After that, it moves to the upper left area, and at the same time, in the process of moving to the upper right area of the first display screen 7a while the three symbols on the right are reduced, it makes one rotation clockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, and then the upper right. Move to the direction area. After that, until the end of the variation display of the first special symbol this time, the three symbols on the left are displayed as pseudo-stops in the upper left region, and the three symbols on the right are displayed as pseudo-stops in the upper right region (FIGS. 67 (C) to (G). )reference).

Next, following the development effect (see FIG. 67 (B)) suggesting the development to SPSP reach as described above, for example, when a group advance notice is performed as a notice effect for notifying the possibility of a big hit. (See FIG. 67 (C)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 67 (C), an effect display showing how a large number of characters move from right to left on the first display screen 7a is performed.

In addition, at the time of development production, the background image corresponding to the 4th normal mode is changed to a black background image (black image), which effectively gives the player a sense of expectation that a group notice will occur. We are going to improve it. Further, FIG. 67 illustrates a state in which the group notice is given after the development effect and then the SPSP reach is developed. However, the SPSP reach may be developed without the group notice being given after the development effect. Yes, the former has higher jackpot reliability than the latter.

When the SPSP reach is started after the development effect and the group notice as described above, the SPSP reach effect image, which is an effect image related to the SPSP reach, is displayed on the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 67 (D)). As a result, for example, an effect display showing how the main character and the enemy character battle each other is performed. After that, when the final stage of the SPSP reach is approached, the first effect button operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the first effect button 63a is performed (see FIG. 67 (E)). Specifically, a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 63a and an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the effective period in which the operation of the first effect button 63a is effective are displayed.

In this first effect button operation promotion effect, a big hit is possible at the timing when the first effect button 63a is operated during the valid period or when the valid period ends without operating the first effect button 63a. As a notice effect for notifying that there is a property, for example, a cut-in is performed in which a predetermined cut-in image is superimposed and displayed on the effect image (other than the reach symbol) displayed on the first display screen 7a (FIG. 67 (FIG. 67). See F)). This cut-in is an effect that suggests the degree of jackpot reliability, and there are cases where a green cut-in that superimposes a green cut-in image is performed and a red that superimposes a red cut-in image. There are cases where cut-in is performed and cases where gold cut-in is performed by superimposing a golden cut-in image.If these cut-ins are arranged in order from the one with the lowest jackpot reliability to the one with the highest reliability, the green cut-in, The order is red cut-in and gold cut-in.

Here, when the first effect button 63a is not operated during the valid period, a case where the cut-in is performed at the timing when the valid period ends has been described as an example, but in other embodiments, the valid period has been described. Another configuration may be adopted in which the cut-in is not performed when the first effect button 63a is not operated.

When the cut-in occurs as described above and the end of the SPSP reach is reached, the second effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the second effect button 63b is performed (see FIG. 67 (G)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 67 (G), during the valid period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, the second effect button image imitating the second effect button 63b and "press!" A character indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b and a valid period gauge indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed.

When the second effect button 63b is operated during the valid period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, the three effect symbols indicating the reach loss are pseudo-stopped and then the main stop is performed as an operation corresponding effect according to the operation. A loss notification effect is performed (see FIG. 67 (H)).

Here, since the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment performed at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is "miss", the loss notification effect is performed as an operation response effect, but this time. When the determination result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is "big hit", a hit notification effect is performed as an operation-corresponding effect, in which three effect symbols showing doublets are pseudo-stopped and then finally stopped.

Further, here, since the loss notification effect is executed in the SPSP reach, which is a highly reliable reach effect, the effect mode is set to the fourth normal with the start of the next variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol. After shifting from the mode to, for example, the first normal mode, the scroll display (here, left scroll) of the symbol sequence is started in the state where the background image dedicated to the first normal mode is displayed (see FIG. 67 (I)). .. Further, since the mode has been shifted to the first normal mode, the effect mode name "first normal mode" is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, and the icon of the normal display mode in the first normal mode ( In the third embodiment, the hexagonal icon) is displayed in the icon display area 9e.

[Specific example of production in the first normal mode]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69, a specific example of the effect performed when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accuracy and low base state. explain. Here, FIGS. 68 and 69 are screen views illustrating the effect in the first normal mode.

As described above based on FIG. 65, when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode, the effect symbol composed of the character image and the numbers is displayed on the first display screen 7a. In FIG. 68A, the first special symbol corresponding to the icon in the normal display mode displayed in the icon display area 9e (the hexagonal icon in the normal display mode dedicated to the first normal mode) is correct or not. In order to notify that the determination result of the determination is "missing", a state in which the three effect symbols indicating the disparity of "524" are finally stopped is illustrated. Specifically, the five symbols included in the lower row of symbols are stopped in the lower left area of the effect symbol display area 7b, and the two symbols included in the middle row of symbols are stopped in the central region of the effect symbol display area 7b. However, a state in which the four symbols included in the upper row of symbols are actually stopped in the upper right region of the effect symbol display area 7b is illustrated.

Further, here, since the effect is controlled in the first normal mode, the current effect mode name "first effect mode" is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a (FIG. 68 (A)). (See), and although not shown in FIG. 68 (A) and the like, a background image dedicated to the first normal mode is displayed as a background image of the effect symbol in the entire area of the first display screen 7a. Further, in FIG. 68 (A), as a result of performing the icon change effect for one hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, the special display mode common to the four normal effect modes is shown. An example shows a state in which a hold icon (for example, a red circular hold icon) is displayed.

A predetermined fixed time (0.6 seconds in the third embodiment) after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol and the effect symbol showing the disparity of "524" is stopped as described above. After that, the first special symbol winning / failing determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon (here, the red and circular hold icon) displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is executed. When the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "big hit" or "missing", the variation pattern of the first special symbol in which the variation effect that develops to the pseudo third station is executed is selected. In that case, the following effects may be executed.

<First common character dialogue production>
That is, when the first special symbol winning / failing determination corresponding to the red and circular hold icon is executed, the hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e and displayed in three columns in the vertical direction. The scroll display of the three symbol rows to the left is started (see FIGS. 68 (A) and 68 (B)). When the left scrolling of the three symbol rows is started in this way, the symbol rows in the lower row are temporarily hidden, and the common character dialogue effect is started. Here, the case where the first common character dialogue effect in this symbol change develops to the third stage of the upper limit will be described as an example.

(First stage production)
First, as the first stage of the first common character dialogue production, the following production is performed. That is, at the start timing of the first stage effect, although not shown in FIG. 68, a similar character image showing the character A common to the character images constituting one symbol included in the lower row of symbols is the first. 1 Appears in the lower right edge region of the display screen 7a. Then, the similar character image showing the character A is scrolled to the left in the same manner as the lower row of symbol rows, and the character images constituting the effect symbols included in the lower row of symbol rows are stopped and displayed in common. Move to the display position (for example, in FIG. 68 (A), the position where the character image indicating the character E constituting the five symbols is displayed: the first position), and the line "B-san!" Is displayed. An effect display is performed to show how the sound is emitted. Specifically, in addition to the similar character image showing the character A, a dialogue frame including the characters "B-san!" Is displayed. At the timing when the dialogue frame including the character "B-san!" Is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character A "B-san!" Is output from the speaker 67.

In the first stage effect, a similar character image showing the same character A as one symbol is scrolled to the left like each effect symbol included in the lower row of symbols, and after moving to the first position, An effect display is performed to show how the character A indicated by the similar character image emits a dialogue (see FIG. 68 (C)). Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the character indicated by the character image constituting the effect symbol included in the lower row of symbols emits a line, and the lower row of symbols is moved to the left. It is possible to obtain a high effect by the synergistic effect of the effect of stopping one of the effect symbols in the lower left region after scrolling to the display and the effect of the first stage.

If the high-speed scroll display of the lower row of symbols is also performed while the first stage of the effect is being performed, the effect symbols included in the lower row of symbols are displayed semi-transparently. Display area of the effect pattern and the display area for displaying the effect image related to the first stage effect (here, a similar character image showing character A and a dialogue frame including the characters "B-san!") Since they overlap with each other, there is a concern that the visibility of the effect image related to the effect of the first stage is lowered.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, as described above, the lower row of symbols is temporarily hidden, and then the first step is performed. (See FIG. 68 (C)). FIG. 68 (C) shows that the scroll display of the upper row and the middle row of the symbol rows is continued, and the scroll display of the lower row of the symbol rows is interrupted.

(2nd stage production)
In the second stage production following the first stage production, the following production is performed. That is, at the start timing of the second stage effect, although not shown in FIG. 68, the effect display (see FIG. 68 (C)) showing how the character A indicated by the similar character image emits a dialogue continues. In the state of being performed, a similar character image showing the same character B as the two symbols included in the upper row of symbols (an effect symbol composed of the number "2" and the character image indicating the character B) is the first. 1 Appears in the upper right edge region of the display screen 7a. Then, the similar character image showing the character B is scrolled to the left in the same manner as the symbol row in the upper row, and the character image constituting the effect symbol included in the symbol row in the upper row is stopped and displayed. (For example, in FIG. 68A, the position where the character image showing the character D constituting the four symbols is displayed: the second position) is moved to the same display position.

In this way, when the similar character image showing the character B is arranged at the second position, the display of the similar character image showing the character A is continued. On the other hand, in order to realize an effect display showing how the similar character image showing the character B emits the line "How is it?", "B" displayed at a position close to the similar character image showing the character A. The dialogue frame containing the characters "Sa-n!" Is erased, and instead, the dialogue frame containing the characters "How are you?" Is displayed at a position close to the similar character image indicating character B (Fig. 68 (Fig. 68). See D)). At the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "How is the condition?" Is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character B "How is the condition?" Is output from the speaker 67.

In the second stage effect, a similar character image showing the same character B as the two symbols is scrolled to the left like each effect symbol included in the upper row of symbols, and after moving to the second position. , An effect display showing how the character B indicated by this similar character image emits a dialogue is performed (see FIG. 68 (D)). Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the character represented by the character image constituting the effect symbol included in the upper row of symbols emits a line, and the upper row of symbols can be displayed. It is possible to obtain a high effect by the synergistic effect of the effect of scrolling to the left and then stopping one of the effect symbols in the upper right area and the effect of the second stage.

If the high-speed scroll display of the upper row of symbols is also performed while the second stage effect is being performed, the effect symbols included in the upper row of symbols are displayed semi-transparently. , A display in which the display area of these effect symbols and the effect image related to the second stage effect (here, a similar character image showing character B and a dialogue frame including the characters "How are you?") Are displayed. Since the areas overlap, there is a concern that the visibility of the effect image related to the effect of the second stage may be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, the upper row of symbols is temporarily hidden, and then the second stage production is performed. It is supposed to be. FIG. 68 (D) shows that the scroll display of the symbol rows in the middle row is continued, and the scroll display of the symbol rows in the lower row and the upper row is interrupted.

(Third stage production)
In the third stage production following the second stage production, the following production is performed. That is, at the start timing of the third stage production, a dialogue frame including the characters "How are you?" Is displayed in a state where the similar character image showing the character A and the similar character image showing the character B are displayed. A similar character image that is erased and instead contains a line frame containing the characters "good feeling!" To realize an effect display showing that the character A is emitting the line "good feeling!" Is displayed at a position close to (see FIG. 68 (E)). At the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "good feeling!" Is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character A "good feeling!" Is output from the speaker 67.

In this way, in the common character dialogue effect that develops step by step from the second stage onward, the numbers that make up the effect symbol are not displayed, but the character images that make up the effect symbol included in the lower row of symbols. (Here, a character image showing a character A) and a similar character image showing a character in common, and a character image (here, a character image showing a character B) constituting an effect symbol included in the upper row of symbols are common. A similar character image showing the character to be used is displayed on the first display screen 7a. Then, an effect showing how the characters shown by these similar character images alternately emit lines is performed using the first display screen 7a and the speaker 67 (see FIGS. 68 (C) to 68 (E)).

Therefore, it is as if the character indicated by the character image constituting the effect symbol included in the lower row of symbols and the character indicated by the character image constituting the effect symbol included in the upper row of symbols are having a conversation. It is possible to give a good impression to the player, and it is possible to obtain a high effect effect in combination with the effect of varyingly displaying the effect pattern.

When the third stage effect is performed as illustrated in FIG. 68 (E), all the effect images related to the third stage effect are erased, and the lower row of symbol rows and the upper row of symbol rows are scrolled at high speed. The display (scroll left) is resumed (see FIGS. 68 (E) and 68 (F)).

Up to this point, the case where the common character dialogue production develops to the upper limit of the third stage and ends has been described as an example, but the third stage production is performed after the first stage production and the second stage production are performed. In some cases, the common character dialogue production ends without the performance of, or in the case where the common character dialogue production ends without the second stage production and the third stage production being performed after the first stage production is performed. is there.

In addition, when comparing the common character dialogue production that ends in the first stage production, the common character dialogue production that ends in the second stage production, and the common character dialogue production that ends in the third stage production, the following Can be said. That is, when the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment performed at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol this time is "big hit", or even if it is "missing", the fluctuation time is relatively long. 1 When the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected, the common character dialogue effect that ends in the third stage effect is most likely to be executed, and the common character dialogue effect that ends in the second stage effect is most likely to be executed next. The common character dialogue production that ends in the first stage production is the most difficult to execute. On the other hand, the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment performed at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is "missing", and the variation pattern of the first special symbol has a relatively short variation time. When is selected, the common character dialogue effect that ends in the first stage effect is most likely to be executed, the common character dialogue effect that ends in the second stage effect is most likely to be executed next, and in the third stage effect. It is the most difficult to execute the common character dialogue production that ends.

From these facts, the jackpot reliability is highest when the common character dialogue effect that ends in the third stage production is executed, and next is the case where the common character dialogue production that ends in the second stage production is executed. The jackpot reliability is high, and the jackpot reliability is the lowest when the common character dialogue effect that ends in the first stage effect is executed.

Further, the common character dialogue effect is characterized in that, for example, the jackpot reliability changes depending on the content of the dialogue emitted by the character in the final stage production. FIG. 68 (E) illustrates how a similar character image of character A emits a line saying “good feeling!”. In addition to this, there are cases where the line "I'm sorry" is issued, the line "Great chance!" Is issued, and the line "Super hot !?" is issued. If you arrange these lines in order from the one with the highest jackpot reliability to the one with the lowest reliability, the order is "super hot !?", "big chance!", "Good feeling!", And "decent".

(Production after the first common character dialogue production is completed)
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 68, when the first common character dialogue effect in the current symbol variation is completed, the high-speed scroll display of the lower row symbol row and the upper row symbol row is resumed as described above (FIG. 68 (Fig. 68). See F)). In this way, when a predetermined time elapses after the high-speed scroll display of the upper and lower symbol rows is restarted, for example, the scroll speed of the lower row symbol row gradually decreases, and the six symbols included in the lower row symbol row (6 symbols) An effect symbol composed of the number “6” and the character image of the character F) is pseudo-stopped in the lower left area of the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 68 (G)). Then, the scroll speed of the upper row of symbol rows gradually decreases, and the six symbols included in the upper row of symbol rows are pseudo-stopped in the upper right region of the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 68 (H)). As a result, the reach with 6 symbols is established, and for example, the normal short reach (see FIG. 62 (E)) is executed. Here, when the variable effect pattern for executing the above-mentioned post-reach pseudo-ream is set, the following effect is executed.

That is, with the two 6 symbols forming the reach pseudo-stopped, the middle symbol composed of only the numbers to which the character image is not added rotates clockwise with the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the axial direction ( Rotate) (see FIG. 68 (H)). Then, each time the middle symbol makes one rotation, the number constituting the middle symbol changes by "1". As a result, for example, the middle symbol changes in ascending order such as 2 symbols, 3 symbols, and 4 symbols. Here, since a variable effect pattern for executing a pseudo-ream after reach is set, when the middle symbol changes to 7 symbols, these 7 symbols do not change to 8 symbols and are displayed in the central area of the effect symbol display area 7b. Pseudo-stop (see FIG. 68 (I)).

In this way, when the first pseudo-continuous effect is executed during the current symbol variation, the pseudo-second variation effect following the pseudo-first variation effect is started. Specifically, after the character "x2" suggesting the start of the pseudo-second variation effect is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the character "x2" is displayed first. It is displayed small in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and accordingly, the scroll display (left scroll) of the three symbol strings is restarted in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 69 (A)).

<Second common character dialogue production>
During this pseudo-second variation effect, the common character dialogue effect may be executed or the common character dialogue effect may be executed. Here, the first time during the pseudo-first variation effect. The common character dialogue effect (see FIGS. 68 (C) to (E)) is executed, and the second common character dialogue effect (see FIGS. 69 (B) to (D)) is performed during the pseudo second continuous variable effect. The case where it is executed will be described as an example. In addition, the second common character dialogue production is composed of a one-stage production (first-stage production) and a two-stage (first-stage production to second-stage production). There are cases where it is composed of three stages of production (first stage to third stage production), but here, the second common character dialogue production is the same as the first common character dialogue production. The explanation will be given by taking as an example a case consisting of three stages of production.

(First stage production)
At the start timing of the first stage of the second common character dialogue production, the lower row of symbols is temporarily hidden, and although it does not appear in FIG. 69 (B), it is included in the lower row 8 A similar character image showing the character H common to the character image constituting the design appears in the lower right end region of the first display screen 7a. Then, the similar character image showing the character H is scrolled to the left in the same manner as the lower row of symbol rows, and the character images constituting the effect symbols included in the lower row of symbol rows are stopped and displayed in common. The effect display is performed (see FIG. 69 (B)) to move to the display position (the first position: see FIG. 68 (A)) to indicate the state of issuing the line "F-san!" Specifically, in addition to the similar character image showing the character H, a dialogue frame including the characters "F-san!" Is displayed. At the timing when the dialogue frame including the character "F-san!" Is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character H "F-san!" Is output from the speaker 67.

In the first stage production (see FIG. 68 (C)) in the first common character dialogue production, the production is executed using a similar character image showing the character A, and the first stage in the second common character dialogue production. In the stage effect (see FIG. 69 (B)), as is clear from the fact that the effect is executed using the similar character image showing the character H, the similar character used for the effect of each stage of the common character dialogue effect. The type of image is variable.

(2nd stage production)
In the second stage production following the first stage production, the following production is performed. That is, at the start timing of the second stage production, the upper row of symbols is temporarily hidden, and although it does not appear in FIGS. 69 (B) to (C), it is the first stage production. Six symbols (numbers) included in the upper row of symbols are displayed while the effect display (see FIG. 69 (B)) showing how the character H indicated by the similar character image that appears emits dialogue is continuously performed. A similar character image showing the same character F as (an effect symbol composed of "6" and a character image showing the character F) appears in the upper right end region of the first display screen 7a. Then, the similar character image showing the character F is scrolled to the left in the same manner as the symbol row in the upper row, and the character image constituting the effect symbol included in the symbol row in the upper row is stopped and displayed. Moves to the common display position (second position: see FIG. 68 (A)).

In this way, when the similar character image showing the character F is arranged at the second position, the display of the similar character image showing the character H is continued. On the other hand, in order to realize an effect display showing how the similar character image showing the character F emits the line "Is it over?", The "F" displayed at a position close to the similar character image showing the character H. The dialogue frame containing the characters "~ n!" Is erased, and instead, the dialogue frame containing the characters "Is it over?" Is displayed at a position close to the similar character image indicating the character F (FIG. 69 (C)). reference). At the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "Is it over?" Is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character F "Is it over?" Is output from the speaker 67.

(Third stage production)
In the third stage production following the second stage production, the following production is performed. That is, at the start timing of the third stage effect, the dialogue frame including the characters "Is it over?" Is deleted while the similar character image showing the character H and the similar character image showing the character F are displayed. Instead, a line frame containing the characters "one more time!" To realize an effect display indicating that the character H is issuing the line "one more time!" Is a similar character indicating the character D. It is displayed at a position close to the image (see FIG. 69 (D)). At the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "one more time!" Is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character H "one more time!" Is output from the speaker 67.

(Production after the second common character dialogue production is completed)
When the third stage effect is performed as illustrated in FIG. 69 (D), all the effect images related to the third stage effect are erased, and the lower row of symbol rows and the upper row of symbol rows are scrolled at high speed. The display (scroll left) is resumed (see FIGS. 69 (D) and (E)).

Here, the execution of the pseudo-continuous production is suggested by the third stage production in the second common character dialogue production (the production in which the character H emits the line "one more time!": See FIG. 69 (D)). There is. Therefore, after the second common character dialogue effect is completed, the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the same manner as the first pseudo-continuous effect described above based on FIGS. 68 (G) to 68 (I). ..

Specifically, when a predetermined time elapses after the high-speed scroll display of the upper and lower symbol rows (see FIG. 69 (E)) is restarted, the scroll speed of the lower row of symbols gradually decreases, for example, the lower row. The two symbols included in the symbol sequence of (FIG. 69 (F)) are pseudo-stopped in the lower left region of the effect symbol display area 7b (the effect symbol composed of the number "2" and the character image of the character B). reference). Then, the scroll speed of the upper row of symbol rows gradually decreases, and the two symbols included in the upper row of symbol rows are pseudo-stopped in the upper right region of the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 69 (G)). As a result, the reach with the two symbols is established, and for example, the normal short reach (see FIG. 62 (E)) is executed.

During this normal short reach, the post-reach pseudo-ream described above is executed. That is, with the two symbols forming the reach pseudo-stopped, the middle symbol composed of only the numbers to which the character image is not added rotates clockwise with the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the axial direction ( Rotate) (see FIG. 69 (G)). Then, each time the middle symbol makes one rotation, the number constituting the middle symbol changes by "1". As a result, for example, the middle symbol changes in ascending order such as 2 symbols, 3 symbols, and 4 symbols. In this way, when the middle symbol changes to 7 symbols in the process of changing, the 7 symbols do not change to 8 symbols and pseudo-stop in the central region of the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 69 (H)).

In this way, when the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed during the current symbol variation, the pseudo-third consecutive variation effect following the pseudo-second variation effect is started. Specifically, after the character "x3" suggesting the start of the pseudo-third series of variation effects is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the character "x3" is displayed first. It is displayed small in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and accordingly, the scroll display (left scroll) of the three symbol strings is restarted in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 69 (I)).

Here, the pseudo-continuous production is executed twice, and the variable production is developed to the pseudo-third series. Therefore, although not shown in FIG. 69, in most cases, it develops into a highly reliable reach effect such as the first SP reach, the second SP reach, and the SPSP reach, and the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed. Will be.

(Characteristics related to common character dialogue production)
As described above with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, it is added to the numbers constituting the effect symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accuracy and low base state. A similar character image having the same display content as the character image constituting the effect symbol is displayed in a predetermined display area on the first display screen 7a, and a common character dialogue effect using the similar character image is executed. (See FIGS. 68 (C) to (E) and 69 (B) to (D)).

When the effect is controlled in the first normal mode, each effect symbol included in the three symbol strings is scrolled and displayed so as to move to the left, whereas a similar character image used for the common character dialogue effect is displayed. Is similarly scrolled to move to the left. Further, the common character dialogue effect is performed in a state where a similar character image is displayed in the same display area where the character image constituting the effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, after the similar character image is variably displayed in the variability mode common to the variability mode of each effect symbol (character image and number) included in the symbol sequence, a predetermined display is performed. A common character dialogue effect is executed using a similar character image displayed in the area. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the character images constituting the effect symbol are performing the common character dialogue effect, and the variable effect that displays the effect pattern in a variable manner and the similar character image are used in common. It is possible to obtain a high production effect by the synergistic effect with the character dialogue production.

Further, after the similar character image is deleted from the first display screen 7a with the end of the common character dialogue effect, the character image (character image showing a different character) whose display content is different from that of the similar character image is provided. The effect symbol composed of the above is displayed in the same display area where the similar character image was displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 68 (E) and 68 (G)).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the character showing a character different from the character shown by the similar character image is shown in the same display area where the similar character image was displayed during the common character dialogue effect. An effect pattern composed of an image is displayed.
Therefore, for example, by displaying a similar character image showing the character A in a predetermined display area and then displaying an effect symbol having the character image showing the same character A in a predetermined display area, the same effect can be obtained. It is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the player misunderstands that the effect symbols are continuously displayed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, each effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner at high speed from the start to the end of the common character dialogue effect, and it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each effect symbol. (See FIGS. 68 (C) to 68 (E)). Then, after the common character dialogue effect is completed (after the similar character image is deleted), the effect pattern visible to the player is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 68 (G)).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, since there is no period in which both the similar character image and the effect symbol are displayed in a visible state, the character image constituting the effect symbol is a common character dialogue effect. It is possible to easily suppress the problem that the player mistakenly recognizes the similar character image as the effect symbol while pretending to be executing.

Up to this point, the common character dialogue effect performed when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode has been described, but as illustrated in FIG. 65, the effect is also controlled when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode. , Similar common character dialogue production is performed. The common character dialogue effect performed when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73.

[Specific example of production in the second normal mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a specific example of the effect performed when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accuracy and low base state will be described. .. Here, FIG. 70 is a screen view illustrating the effect in the second normal mode.

FIG. 70A shows a first special display corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e in a state where two hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a. In order to notify that the judgment result of the symbol hit / miss judgment is "missing", the production symbol showing the disparity of "513" was stopped and displayed as the lost symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. The state is illustrated. Here, since the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, the current effect mode name "second effect mode" is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, and FIG. 70 (A) shows. However, a background image dedicated to the second normal mode is displayed as a background image of the effect pattern in the entire area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 65). Further, since the icon change effect is not performed, the two hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 9c and the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e are both diamond-shaped. It is displayed as an icon of the normal display mode (an icon dedicated to the second normal mode).

Since the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, each effect symbol displayed on the first display screen 7a (see, for example, FIG. 70 (A)) is any of the characters A to I. A character image representing the upper half of the body, which represents a character larger than the character image constituting the effect symbol displayed when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode (see, for example, FIG. 68 (A)). It is configured to have. Further, a number is added to the lower right of the character image in the effect symbol displayed when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode (see FIG. 70 (A)).

When a predetermined fixed time (0.6 seconds in the third embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c (here). Then, the first special symbol winning / failing determination corresponding to the holding icon on the left side of the two diamond-shaped holding icons: see FIG. 70A) is executed. Then, the determination result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is "missing", and as the variation effect pattern of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation effect pattern of the reachless effect is generated by the effect control microcomputer 91. When selected, the following effects are performed.

That is, the most displayed in the hold icon display area 9c as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol hit / fail determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon. The previous hold icon shifts to the icon display area 9e, and the remaining hold icons shift in the direction of approaching the icon display area 9e in the hold icon display area 9c, and the three symbol columns are scrolled (scroll down). Is started (see FIGS. 70 (A) and 70 (B)). When a predetermined time elapses after the scroll display of these three symbol rows is started, one symbol included in the symbol row in the left column and two symbols included in the symbol row in the right column are pseudo-stopped (FIG. 70 (Fig. 70). See C)). It should be noted that these 1 symbol and 2 symbols may be pseudo-stopped in the order of 1 symbol and 2 symbols, may be pseudo-stopped in the order of 2 symbols and 1 symbol, or 1 symbol and 2 symbols may be pseudo-stopped at the same time. is there.

Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, for example, the six symbols included in the middle row symbol row are pseudo-stopped, and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. Along with this, the three effect symbols showing the disparity of "162" are finally stopped (see FIG. 70 (D)).

Next, when a predetermined fixed time elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, it corresponds to the earliest hold icon (see FIG. 70 (D)) displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. The first special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed. Then, the determination result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is "missing", and as the variation effect pattern of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation effect pattern of the reachless effect is generated by the effect control microcomputer 91. When selected, the following effects may be performed.

That is, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon in the horizontal direction. The scroll display (down scroll) of the three symbol columns displayed in three columns is started (see FIG. 70 (E)).

(Composite production in the second normal mode)
When the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, the above-mentioned composite effect may be executed immediately after the scroll display of the three symbol strings is started. When this composite effect is executed, the three symbol strings are hidden after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the scroll display of the three symbol strings was started (see FIG. 70 (F)). .. Then, for example, an effect display is executed in which a character image showing the character H constituting the eight symbols appears in the right side region of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 70 (F)).

In this way, when eight symbols appear in the right area of the first display screen 7a, the number "8" appears in the upper left region of the first display screen 7a, and the number "8" is the symbol in the left column. Similar to the columns, they are scrolled to move downward (see FIG. 70 (G)). Further, as also illustrated in FIG. 70 (G), the character image showing the character H moves to the left as the eight symbols scroll downward.

After that, when the character image showing the character H and the number "8" move to the left side area in the effect symbol display area 7b, these character images and the numbers are combined into one effect symbol (here, 8 symbols). Is performed (see FIGS. 70 (G) to 70 (H)).

When the eight symbols completed by this composite effect are pseudo-stopped in the left area of the effect symbol display area 7b, for example, the four symbols included in the middle row of symbols and the five symbols included in the right column of symbols are displayed. As it moves from above (see FIG. 70 (I)), the three effect symbols indicating the disparity of "845" are pseudo-stopped, and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. The three production symbols indicating the above may be stopped.

As described with reference to FIG. 70, when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, a composite effect that synthesizes the character image and the numbers may be executed. In this way, in addition to the case where the effect symbol is formed from the beginning, the effect symbol may be formed on the first display screen 7a. Therefore, the display control in which the effect symbol is pseudo-stopped and then finally stopped. By repeating the above steps, the production becomes monotonous, and as a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the interest is reduced.

In addition, although the case where the synthetic effect in which the effect symbol included in the symbol row of the left column (here, 8 symbols on the left: see FIG. 70 (H)) is formed is executed is described as an example, the middle column has been described. In some cases, a composite effect in which the effect symbols included in the symbol string of the above is formed, or a composite effect in which the effect symbols included in the symbol string in the right column are formed is executed.

Further, in the third embodiment, the effect symbol (left symbol) included in the symbol row in the left column and the effect symbol (middle symbol) included in the symbol row in the middle row during one variation display of the first special symbol. ) And one of the effect symbols (right symbol) included in the symbol row in the right column (in the example shown in FIG. 70, the left 8 symbols) will be described as an example of executing a composite effect. I do. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, during the variable display of the first special symbol, a composite effect of forming the left symbol is performed, and then a composite effect of forming the right symbol is performed. You may try to perform the composition effect of the times.

Further, in the third embodiment, a case where the composite effect is executed immediately after the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol is started will be described as an example, but in another embodiment, for example, when the reach is established. , When a composite effect is performed to form an effect symbol that becomes a reach symbol, or when three effect symbols indicating lost eyes (reach lost eyes or loose eyes) are pseudo-stopped at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol. , A synthetic effect that forms any one of the effect symbols may be performed.

[Specific example of production in the third normal mode]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, a specific example of the effect performed when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accuracy and low base state. Will be described. Here, FIGS. 71 to 73 are screen views illustrating the effect in the third normal mode.

In FIG. 71A, the first special corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e in a state where two hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a. In order to notify that the judgment result of the symbol hit / miss judgment is "missing", the production symbol showing the disparity of "431" was stopped and displayed as the lost symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. The state is illustrated. Here, since the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, the current effect mode name "third effect mode" is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, and FIG. 71 (A) shows. However, a background image dedicated to the third normal mode is displayed as a background image of the effect pattern in the entire area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 65). Further, since the icon change effect is not performed, the two hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 9c and the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e both form an inverted triangle. It is displayed as an icon of the normal display mode (the icon dedicated to the third normal mode).

Since the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, each effect symbol displayed on the first display screen 7a (see, for example, FIG. 71 (A)) is any of the characters A to I wearing the dress. It is a character image representing the character, and a corresponding number is added to the lower center portion of each character image.

In order to notify that the determination result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment corresponding to the icon illustrated in FIG. 71 (A) is "missing", a predetermined one is specified after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. When the confirmation time elapses, it corresponds to the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c (here, the hold icon on the left side of the two inverted triangle hold icons: see FIG. 71 (A)). The first special symbol hit / miss determination is executed. Then, the determination result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is "missing", and as the variation effect pattern of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation effect pattern of the reachless effect is generated by the effect control microcomputer 91. When selected, the following effects are performed.

That is, the most displayed in the hold icon display area 9c as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol hit / fail determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon. The previous hold icon shifts to the icon display area 9e, and the remaining hold icons shift in the direction of approaching the icon display area 9e in the hold icon display area 9c, and variable display of the three effect symbols is started. (See FIG. 71 (B)).

When the effect is controlled in the third normal mode and the first special symbol is stopped, a character image corresponding to any number of "1" to "9" is added to the effect symbol display area 7b. The three effect symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction (see FIG. 71 (A)). On the other hand, when the next variable display of the first special symbol is started, the character image is deviated from each number of the three effect symbols, and each effect symbol is in the process of changing the number of each effect symbol. It is displayed in a variable manner with no character image added (see FIGS. 71B to 71D).

The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol rotate clockwise with the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the axial direction (see, for example, FIGS. 71 (B) to (D)). Then, by rotating each effect symbol once, the effect symbol having the number added by "1" is displayed. In FIGS. 71 (B) to 71 (D), the left 4 symbols are rotated once clockwise to display the left 5 symbols, the middle 3 symbols are rotated once clockwise to display the middle 4 symbols, and the right 1 is displayed. It is illustrated that the symbol is rotated once clockwise and the two symbols on the right are displayed.

(Composite production in the second normal mode)
When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol, a composite effect different from the composite effect (see FIGS. 70 (G) to (H)) performed in the second normal mode is performed. Will be executed. That is, for example, the left symbol indicating "8" is temporarily enlarged and displayed in the left region in the effect symbol display area 7b, and the character image indicating the character H is moved from above along with the effect display. Is performed (see FIG. 71 (E)). Then, a composite effect of synthesizing the character image showing the character H and the number "8" is executed (see FIGS. 71 (E) to 71 (F)). Note that FIG. 71 (F) illustrates a state in which the left eight symbols are pseudo-stopped and the middle symbol and the right symbol are continuously displayed in a variable manner.

In this way, when the composite effect for forming the left symbol (here, the left 8 symbols) is executed, the composite effect for forming the right symbol is executed with the left 8 symbols pseudo-stopped (FIG. 71 (FIG. 71). See G) to (H)). That is, for example, the right symbol indicating "2" is temporarily enlarged and displayed in the right region in the effect symbol display area 7b, and the character image indicating the character B is moved from above. Is performed (see FIG. 71 (G)). Then, a composite effect of synthesizing the character image showing the character B and the number "2" is executed (see FIGS. 71 (G) to 71 (H)). Note that FIG. 71 (G) illustrates a state in which the hold icon in the special display mode is newly displayed in the hold icon display area 9c as the second hold icon. Further, FIG. 71 (H) illustrates a state in which the variable display of the middle symbol is continued in a state where the two symbols on the right are pseudo-stopped in addition to the eight symbols on the left.

In this way, when the composite effect for forming the right symbol (here, the right two symbols) is executed, the composite effect for forming the middle symbol is executed with the left eight symbols and the right two symbols pseudo-stopped. (See FIGS. 71 (I) and 72 (A)). That is, for example, the middle symbol indicating "6" is temporarily enlarged and displayed in the central region of the effect symbol display area 7b, and the character image indicating the character F is moved from above. Is performed (see FIG. 71 (I)). Then, a synthetic effect of synthesizing the character image showing the character F and the number "6" is executed (see FIGS. 71 (I) to 72 (A)). Note that FIG. 72 (A) illustrates a state in which the left 8 symbols, the right 2 symbols, and the middle 6 symbols to which the corresponding character images are added are pseudo-stopped, and these effect symbols are “missing”. As the first special symbol for notifying "is stopped and displayed, the main stop is performed.

When a predetermined time elapses after the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol hit / fail determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is executed. Then, the determination result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is "missing", and as the variation effect pattern of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation effect pattern of the reachless effect is generated by the effect control microcomputer 91. When selected, the following effects may be performed.

That is, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon, and the hold icon is displayed. The remaining hold icon (here, the hold icon in the special display mode) displayed in the display area 9c shifts toward the icon display area 9e (see FIGS. 72 (A) and 72 (B)).

Further, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the character image indicating the character H is removed from the left 8 symbols, the character image indicating the character F is removed from the middle 6 symbols, and the character indicating the character B is removed from the right 2 symbols. The image is disengaged, and the variable display of the three effect symbols to which the character image is not added is started (see FIGS. 72 (A) to 72 (C)). Since the variable display of these three effect symbols is the same as that described above based on FIGS. 71 (B) to 71 (D), detailed description here will be omitted.

(Common character dialogue production in the 3rd normal mode)
When the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, a common character dialogue effect similar to the common character dialogue effect performed when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode is executed. Here, the case where the common character dialogue production is composed of one stage of production and the common character dialogue production of the production content related to the common character dialogue production performed by the next symbol variation is executed will be described as an example. ..

As illustrated in FIG. 72 (B), when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the three effect symbols to which the character image is not added, for example, the character D common to the character images constituting the four symbols A similar character image showing the above appears in the upper left edge region of the first display screen 7a. The character image showing the character D is the same display position as the character image constituting the left symbol is displayed (in the example shown in FIG. 72 (A), the character indicating the character H constituting the left 8 symbols). It moves to the display position where the image is displayed), and an effect display is performed to show how the line "A-san!" Is emitted (see FIG. 72 (D)). Specifically, in addition to the similar character image showing the character D, a dialogue frame including the characters "A-san!" Is displayed. At the timing when the dialogue frame including the character "A-san!" Is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character D "A-san!" Is output from the speaker 67.

This common character dialogue effect (see FIG. 72 (D)) is an effect related to the first common character dialogue effect (see FIG. 72 (H)) performed in the next symbol variation, and is similar to the character A. It has a function as a warning effect for notifying that the character image will appear in the next symbol variation. When such a common character dialogue effect is being executed, the variable display of the middle symbol and the right symbol is continued (see FIG. 72 (D)).

(Direction after the common character dialogue production is finished)
In this way, when the common character dialogue effect as an effect display showing how the character D calls the character A is executed, the similar character image showing the character D appearing in the common character dialogue effect moves to the left, for example. It moves and is erased from the first display screen 7a. FIG. 72 (E) illustrates a state in which a similar character image showing the character D is being erased from the first display screen 7a after the common character dialogue effect is completed.

When the common character dialogue effect is completed in the above flow, the variable display of the left symbol is restarted, and the three effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner similar to the state shown in FIG. 72 (C). After that, although not shown in FIG. 72, a composite effect of synthesizing the character image showing the character E and the number "5", and a composite effect of synthesizing the character image showing the character D and the number "4". A composite effect of synthesizing the character image showing the character F and the number "6" is executed, and as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, "456" exemplified in FIG. 72 (F) is displayed. The production design that shows the disparity of "" will stop. It should be noted that each of the synthetic effects related to these three effect symbols is performed in the same manner as the above-mentioned synthetic effects based on FIGS. 71 (E) to (I) and 72 (A). Omit.

The first special symbol for notifying the loss is stopped and displayed, and when a predetermined confirmation time elapses after the three effect symbols indicating the disparity of "546" are stopped, they are displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. The first special symbol hit / fail determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon (here, the hold icon in the special display mode, for example, the red circular hold icon: see FIG. 72 (F)) is executed.

When this first special symbol hit / fail determination is executed, the earliest hold icon (hold icon in the special display mode) displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is started as the variable display of the first special symbol is started. ) Is shifted to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon, the character image showing the character E is removed from the left 5 symbols, the character image showing the character D is removed from the middle 4 symbols, and the character F is removed from the right 6 symbols. The indicated character image is removed, and variable display of the three effect symbols to which the character image is not added is started (see FIGS. 72 (F) to 72 (G)). Since the variable display of these three effect symbols is the same as that described above based on FIGS. 71 (B) to 71 (D), detailed description here will be omitted.

In the following description based on FIGS. 72 (G) to 72 (I) and 73, two pseudo-continuous effects are executed during the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the red and circular icon. The case where the first common character dialogue effect is executed during the first variation effect and the second common character dialogue effect is executed during the pseudo third variation effect will be described as an example.

<First common character dialogue production>
When the red and circular hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon, and the variation display of the three effect symbols is started, the first time in this symbol variation. (See FIG. 72 (H)). Specifically, the similar character image showing the character A called by the character D (see FIG. 72 (D)) shown by the similar character image that appeared during the previous symbol variation is the upper left edge on the first display screen 7a. Appears in the department area. The character image showing the character A is the same display position as the character image constituting the left symbol is displayed (in the example shown in FIG. 72 (A), the character indicating the character H constituting the left 8 symbols). It moves to the display position where the image is displayed), and the dialogue frame including the characters "NEXT!" Is displayed at a position close to it (see FIG. 72 (H)). Further, at the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "NEXT!" Is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character A "NEXT!" Is output from the speaker 67. When such a common character dialogue effect is being executed, the variable display of the middle symbol and the right symbol is continued (see FIG. 72 (H)).

This first common character dialogue production suggests the execution of a pseudo-continuous production. That is, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 69 (B), it is not an effect of calling the character indicated by another similar character image. Therefore, the first common character dialogue production ends in the first stage production without executing the production in the second and subsequent stages.

In this way, when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, the current symbol variation is regarded as the second symbol variation, and the previous symbol variation is regarded as the first symbol variation, the second symbol variation. During the fluctuation, the common character dialogue effect (see FIG. 72 (H)) associated with the common character dialogue effect (see FIG. 72 (D)) performed during the first symbol variation is executed.

(Common character dialogue production, production after the first time is over)
As described above, when the first common character dialogue effect suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, a similar character image showing the character A is generated as described above based on FIG. 72 (E). 1 It is erased from the display screen 7a (see FIG. 72 (I)). When the similar character image showing the character A is erased in this way, the variable display of the left symbol is restarted, and the three effect symbols are varied and displayed (see FIG. 73 (A)).

Next, when a predetermined time elapses after the three effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, a composite effect of synthesizing the character image of the character A and the number "1" in the left side area of the effect symbol display area 7b is performed. At the same time, a composite effect of synthesizing the character image of the character A and the number "1" is executed in the right area, and as a result, a reach is established with one symbol (see FIG. 73 (B)).

Here, since the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is suggested by the first common character dialogue effect described above based on FIG. 72 (H), the above-mentioned is described during the normal short reach executed after the reach is established. After reach, a pseudo-ream is executed (see FIG. 73 (C)). That is, in a state where the two symbols forming the reach are pseudo-stopped, the middle symbol composed of only the numbers to which the character image is not added rotates clockwise with the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the axial direction ( (Rotate) (see FIG. 73 (B)), and the middle 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the central region of the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 73 (C)).

In this way, when the first pseudo-continuous effect is executed during the current symbol variation, the pseudo-second variation effect following the pseudo-first variation effect is started. Specifically, after the character "x2" suggesting the start of the pseudo-second variation effect is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the character "x2" is displayed in the first display. It is displayed small in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and accordingly, in the effect symbol display area 7b, the variable display of the three effect symbols composed only of the numbers to which the character image is not added is restarted (FIG. 73 (FIG. 73). See D)).

Then, during the pseudo-second variation effect, the middle 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped in a state where the reach is established with the five symbols, so that the second pseudo-continuous effect in the current symbol variation is executed (FIG. 73). See (E)). In this way, when the second pseudo continuous effect is executed, the pseudo third variable effect following the pseudo second variable effect is started. Specifically, after the character "x3" suggesting the start of the pseudo-third consecutive variation effect is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the character "x3" is displayed first. It is displayed small in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and accordingly, in the effect symbol display area 7b, the variable display of the three effect symbols composed only of the numbers to which the character image is not added is restarted (FIG. 73 (FIG. 73). See F)).

<Second common character dialogue production>
During the pseudo-third series of variation effects developed in this way, the second common character dialogue effect in this symbol variation is executed (see FIGS. 73 (G) to 73 (I)). This second common character dialogue production is configured as a three-stage production, and is similar to the common character dialogue production (see FIGS. 68 (C) to (E)) performed in the first normal mode. It is configured.

(First stage production)
In the first stage of the production, first, a similar character image showing the character D common to the character images constituting the left four symbols appears in the upper left end region of the first display screen 7a. Then, the similar character image showing the character D moves downward so as to be arranged at the same display position (left / common display position) where the character image constituting the left symbol is displayed, and the similar character image is displayed. When is moved to the left / common display position, a dialogue frame containing the characters "G-san!" Is displayed at a position close to it (see FIG. 73 (G)). Further, at the timing when the dialogue frame including the character "G-san!" Is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character D "G-san!" Is output from the speaker 67. Such a first stage effect is performed in a state where the variable display of the left symbol is interrupted and the variable display of the middle symbol and the right symbol is continued.

(2nd stage production)
At the start timing of the second stage effect, first, a similar character image showing the character G common to the character images constituting the right 7 symbols appears in the upper right end region of the first display screen 7a. Then, the similar character image showing the character G moves downward so as to be arranged at the same display position (right / common display position) where the character image constituting the right symbol is displayed, and the similar character image is displayed. Moves to the right / common display position. Then, the dialogue frame containing the characters "G-san!" Is erased, and the dialogue frame containing the characters "What?" Representing the dialogue of the character G is close to the similar character image indicating the character G. It is displayed at the position where it is to be displayed (see FIG. 73 (H)). Further, at the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "What is it?" Is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character G "What is it?" Is output from the speaker 67. Such a second stage effect is performed in a state in which the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is interrupted and the variable display of the middle symbol is continued.

(Third stage production)
In the third stage of the production, the dialogue frame containing the characters "What?" Is erased, and the dialogue frame containing the characters "Great chance!" Representing the dialogue of character D is a similar character indicating character D. It is displayed at a position close to the image (see FIG. 73 (I)). Further, at the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "Great Chance!" Is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character D "Great Chance!" Is output from the speaker 67.

In addition, there are "chance", "great chance", and "super hot" in the lines displayed in the third stage production. Here, the line of "chance" suggests that the jackpot reliability is relatively low, and when the line frame including the character of "chance" is displayed, the first SP reach, the second SP reach, and so on. It is difficult to develop into a highly reliable reach production such as SPSP reach, and even if it develops, it has a feature that a loss notification production is easily executed. In addition, the line of "Big Chance" suggests that the jackpot reliability is medium, and if the line frame containing the word "Big Chance" is displayed, the word "Chance" is included. Compared to the case where the dialogue frame is displayed, it is easier to develop a highly reliable reach effect such as the 1st SP reach, the 2nd SP reach, and the SPSP reach, and it is easier to execute the hit notification effect in any of these reach effects. It has the feature. In addition, the "Gekiatsu" line suggests that the jackpot reliability is relatively high, and if a line frame containing the "Gekiatsu" character is displayed, the probability is extremely high (for example, 90). %), It develops into a highly reliable reach effect such as 1st SP reach, 2nd SP reach, and SPSP reach, and has the feature that the hit notification effect is easier to execute than when other lines are displayed. doing.

In the example shown in FIG. 73, since the variation effect has developed to the pseudo-third station and the line "Great chance!" Is displayed, the first SP reach, the second SP reach, or the SPSP reach. It develops and a hit notification effect or a loss notification effect is executed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the jackpot reliability is configured to change depending on the stage of development of the common character dialogue effect, and the jackpot reliability is arranged in order from the lowest to the highest. In this case, the order is the common character dialogue production that ends in the first stage production, the common character dialogue production that ends in the second stage production, and the common character dialogue production that ends in the third stage production. In addition, the jackpot reliability is configured to change depending on how many times the common character dialogue effect is executed during one variable display of the first special symbol, in order from the one with the lowest jackpot reliability to the one with the highest jackpot reliability. When arranged side by side, if the common character dialogue effect is executed only once during one variable display of the first special symbol, the common character dialogue effect is executed twice during one variable display of the first special symbol. In this case, the order is the case where the common character dialogue effect is executed three times during one variable display of the first special symbol.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode or the third normal mode, the common character dialogue effect may be executed, whereas the second normal mode may be executed. When the effect is controlled in the mode or the fourth normal mode, the common character dialogue effect is not executed.

In this way, since there are an effect mode in which the common character dialogue effect is executed and an effect mode in which the common character dialogue effect is not executed, by shifting the effect mode between the effect mode in which the common character dialogue is executed and the effect mode in which the effect is not executed, the common character is used. Since the dialogue effect is executed, and conversely, the common character dialogue effect is not executed, it is possible to cause an effective effect change.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the effect symbol composed of the character image and the number is variablely displayed along with the variable display of the first special symbol, and is accompanied by the stop display of the first special symbol. The effect symbol may be stopped and displayed in a manner showing the determination result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination. On the other hand, the character image and the number may be displayed individually, and these character images and the number may be combined and displayed as an effect symbol (for example, FIGS. 70 (F) to (H), 71 (Fig.)). E)-(F)). Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while guessing which effect symbol is displayed based on the displayed character image (or number), and when the character image and the number are still combined. In comparison, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the effect of displaying the effect pattern.

Further, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of displaying the character image (or number), the display of the number (or character image) is started, and these character images and the numbers are combined and displayed as an effect symbol. .. In this way, since the character images and numbers constituting the effect symbol are displayed in order to display the state in which the effect symbol is formed, the effect symbol does not change from the state in which the effect symbol is composed of the character image and the numbers. It is possible to obtain an extremely high effect as compared with a conventional game machine.

In the third embodiment, the case where the effect using the similar character image is the common character dialogue effect has been described as an example, but the effect using the similar character image is not limited to the common character dialogue effect, and for example, the similar character image shows. It may be an effect in which the character notifies the transition of the effect mode, or an icon change effect in which the character indicated by the similar character image changes the display mode of the icon.

[Processing executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Example 3]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the following processing is executed in order to realize the effects described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 73.

(Processing related to fluctuation production)
In the process of step S4503 (see FIG. 52), the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the current effect mode to the first normal mode, the second normal mode, the third normal mode, and the current mode status by referring to the current mode status. Identify which of the fourth normal modes.

Although not shown in the figure, the ROM of the sub-control board 90 stores a variation effect pattern determination table and a notice effect pattern determination table. The variation effect pattern determination table is a table that is referred to when determining a variation effect pattern, which is an effect pattern of the variation effect including the variation display of the effect symbol. The notice effect pattern determination table in the third embodiment is a table referred to when determining a notice effect pattern, which is an effect pattern of various notice effects that announce the possibility of a big hit prior to the hit notification effect (or loss notification effect). Is.

In the third embodiment, the variation effect pattern determination table and the advance notice effect pattern determination table are prepared for each effect mode, and at least the first normal mode / variation effect pattern determination table and the first variation effect pattern determination table are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. 2 Normal mode / variable effect pattern determination table, 3rd normal mode / variable effect pattern determination table, 4th normal mode / variable effect pattern determination table, 1st normal mode / advance notice effect pattern determination table, 2nd normal mode The mode / notice effect pattern determination table, the third normal mode / advance notice effect pattern determination table, and the fourth normal mode / advance notice effect pattern determination table are stored.

In the process of step S4504 (see FIG. 52), the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the effect mode (normal effect mode) specified in the process of step S4503 and the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80. The effect pattern determination table and the advance notice effect pattern determination table are read from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 and set in the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

In the subsequent processing of step S4505 (see FIG. 52), the effect control microcomputer 91 uses the random number for determining the variation effect acquired in the process of step S4501 (see FIG. 52), the determination result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination, and the first special. The variation effect pattern is set by reading the variation effect pattern of 1 from the variation effect pattern determination table set in the RAM based on the variation pattern of the symbol. Although detailed description is omitted, by executing this variable effect pattern setting process, the symbol configuration of the effect symbol, the variation mode of the effect symbol, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the effect constituting the reach symbol are performed. The type of symbol, the type and content of reach effect, the content when performing a pseudo-continuous effect, the presence or absence of a composite effect (see FIG. 65), the type of effect symbol that is stopped and displayed, the type of background image, BGM, etc. It is determined.

Further, in the process of step S4506 (see FIG. 52), the effect control microcomputer 91 is the random number for determining the advance notice effect acquired in the process of step S4501 (see FIG. 52), the determination result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination, and the first. The notice effect pattern is set by reading the notice effect pattern of 1 from the notice effect pattern determination table set in the RAM based on the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation effect pattern set in the process of step S4505. By executing this advance notice effect pattern setting process, it is determined whether or not to execute various advance notice effects, and if so, what kind of effect pattern is used to execute the advance notice effect. In addition, as the notice effect, in Example 3, for example, SU notice (see FIG. 66 (C)), group notice (see FIG. 67 (C)), cut-in (see FIG. 67 (F)), common character dialogue. An example is a production (see FIG. 65).

[Other aspects]
Further, in the first embodiment described above, when the game state after the end of the big hit game is set to the high accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state is a specification that continues until the next big hit occurs. When the game state after the big hit game is set to the high accuracy high base state by changing to such a big hit type, or in addition to such a big hit type, a predetermined number of times in the high accuracy high base state. If the jackpot is not reached until the variation display of the special symbol (50 or 100) is completed, a jackpot type may be provided in which the gaming state changes to the high accuracy and low base state. By providing such a big hit type, the game state after the big hit game ends becomes a high base state, and when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times in the high base state, it depends on the big hit type and then. There are a case where the gaming state of the game shifts to a low probability low base state, a case where the high probability high base state is continued, and a case where the game state shifts to a high probability low base state.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the changing mode (transition mode) of the gaming state, enhance the game playability, and enhance the gaming interest. In addition, by executing a common game effect in a high base state from the end of the big hit game to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times, the variation display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which gaming state the player will shift to after the execution of. As a result, the player's playing interest in the high base state is enhanced, and the expectation for the advantageous state is raised. Further, as a result, even if the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is not the high-accuracy low-base state but the high-accuracy low-base state, the game state changes to the high-accuracy low-base state after a predetermined number of fluctuations. It will be possible to play the game in anticipation of. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the game entertainment interest for a long period of time.

Further, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b) and the second special symbol display (variable state display 49 c1 and c2). ) Are all displayed and controlled by the main control unit. Instead of this mode, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the second special symbol display (variation). The display control of c1 and c2) of the status display 49 may be performed by another control unit such as a sub control unit. As a result, even if a problem occurs in the display control of one control unit, if the display control of the other control is appropriate, it is possible to notify the correct game information. Further, the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display are both provided on the same display unit (main display 40). As a result, the first special symbol display controlled by the main control unit and the second special symbol display controlled by the sub control unit are provided in the vicinity, and the consistency of the display contents of both can be confirmed and the display control is performed. It is possible to easily confirm that there is no problem with.

Similarly, in the first embodiment, the display control of both the first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42) and the second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49) is performed by the main control unit. I decided to do it. In this mode, the first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42) is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49) is sub-controlled. The display may be controlled by another control unit such as a unit. As a result, the same effect as that of the special symbol display described above is obtained.

Further, in addition to the second special symbol display and the second ordinary symbol display, a second first special symbol hold indicator, a second second special symbol hold indicator, and a second normal figure (not shown) are shown. A hold indicator may be provided. At this time, the first special figure hold indicator (1st special figure hold indicator 43a, 2nd special figure hold indicator 43b) and the second normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42) are mainly controlled. The display is controlled by the unit, and the second special figure hold indicator (first special figure hold indicator, second special figure hold indicator) and the second normal figure hold indicator are controlled by other control units such as the sub-control unit. It may be controlled by. In addition, these, the first special figure hold indicator (1st special figure hold indicator 43a, the second special figure hold indicator 43b), the first normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42), the first The special figure holding indicator (second first special figure holding indicator, second second special figure holding indicator) and the second normal drawing holding indicator may be provided on the same main indicator 40. it can. As a result, it is possible to improve the listability of the two, easily confirm the consistency of the displayed contents, and easily confirm whether or not there is a problem in the display control.

In addition, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b), the first ordinary symbol display (ordinary symbol display 42), and the first special symbol hold indicator (1st special figure hold indicator 43a, 2nd special figure hold indicator 43b), 1st normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42), 2nd special symbol indicator (variable state indicator 49) C1 and c2), the second ordinary symbol indicator (variable state indicator 49 c3), the second special figure hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure) The hold indicator) and the second normal figure hold indicator may all be provided on the same main indicator 40. As a result, it is possible to improve the listability of these display units and easily confirm whether or not there is a problem in the display control by the main control unit and the display control by the sub control. Further, the main display 40 can be provided on the outside (outside) of the game area 3. Further, it can be provided on the game board 2 on the outside (outside) of the game area 3.

In addition, if the power is cut off (power cut) for some reason during the game or the game machine is operating (power is on), the display is controlled by the main control unit when the power is supplied again. Special symbol display (1st special symbol display 41a and 2nd special symbol display 41b), 1st normal symbol display (ordinary symbol display 42), 1st special symbol hold indicator (1st special) The figure hold indicator 43a, the second special figure hold indicator 43b), and the first normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42) first execute display (display control) (restart and return). , The second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the variable state indicator 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state indicator 49), and the second special figure whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit. The hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator) and the second normal figure hold indicator later execute (restart, return) display (display control). ..

However, the second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the variable state display 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49), and the second feature whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit. The figure hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator) and the second normal figure hold indicator are image display devices whose display is also controlled by the sub-control unit. The display (display control) is executed (restarted and restored) before (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and / and the third image display device 72). This is a simple display control in which the main display lights, turns off, and blinks a single LED, respectively, while the image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, or /, and so on. This is because the 3 image display device 72) is composed of a liquid crystal display unit and has a more complicated display control than the main display device.

As a result, even if the display unit shows the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not or the fluctuation state is controlled by the same sub-control unit, the first sub-display unit that quickly returns the display after the power is turned on again (after the power is restored). And a second sub-display unit that returns the display with a delay after that. Then, depending on each role, it becomes possible to execute the optimum game control. The first sub-display unit includes a second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the variable state display 49) and a second normal symbol display (variable state display 49) whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit. C3), the second special figure hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator), and the second normal figure hold indicator are applicable and simple. With the display control, it is possible to easily grasp the fluctuation state and the like, and it is possible to quickly recover after the power is turned on again. Further, the second sub-display unit corresponds to an image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, or /, and third image display device 72) whose display is also controlled by the sub-control unit. However, with complicated display control, various game information and game effects (reach effect, notice effect, story effect, etc.) can be displayed, and it is possible to improve the taste by various game effects.

Further, in still another aspect, if the power is cut off (power cut) for some reason during the game or the game machine is operating (power is on), when the power is supplied again, the sub-control unit causes the sub-control unit. A second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the variable state display 49), a second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49), and a second special symbol hold display (second) whose display is controlled. 2 1st special figure hold indicator, 2nd 2nd special figure hold indicator), 2nd normal figure hold indicator first executes (restarts, returns) display (display control), and the main control unit First special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b), first ordinary symbol display (ordinary symbol display 42), first special symbol whose display is controlled by The hold indicator (first special figure hold indicator 43a, second special figure hold indicator 43b) and the first normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42) later execute (restart) display (display control). , And the image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, or / and third image display device 72) whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit is further displayed (display control). ) May be executed (restart, return).

In the above-described embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the effect symbol display unit are set as the subject of the game in the game state according to the game state (the first special symbol described later). Or, it is assumed that the variable display is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol). That is, one effect symbol (three digits) is displayed on the effect symbol display unit, and by synchronizing with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the game state, the first special symbol is synchronized. It has a case and a case synchronized with the second special symbol. In this manner, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the variable display of the first effect symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second effect symbol is the second special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of. Further, when both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one of the special symbols) set as the subject of the game in the game state is displayed in a large size (subject). (Displayed as), and the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (the other special symbol) that is not the subject of the game may be displayed in a small size. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. Further, instead of displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol at all times, both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed according to the game state and the game situation, and the first effect symbol is displayed. One of the effect symbol and the second effect symbol (main symbol) may be displayed.

In addition, with respect to the above-mentioned configuration of the game machine, a "variable ball entry port" that can be changed into a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second. It is possible to provide a "special game execution means" capable of executing a special game in which the variable entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered when the result of the 1st hit / fail determination or the 2nd hit / fail determination is a hit. Further, the "second starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed into the first aspect and the second aspect in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect. In addition, a game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency (first game state), and a game in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than that of the game state. It can be provided with a "game state setting means" for setting a state (second game state). Here, it is assumed that 0 is included in the "predetermined frequency".

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set to one, but the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set. It may be multiple times or may have different open times. Further, in this embodiment, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are control processes that can be changed at the same time, but the second special figure hold is preferentially digested over the first special figure hold. , The so-called special figure 2 priority control process, the control process of preferentially digesting the first special figure hold over the second special figure hold, and the so-called special figure 1 priority control process may be performed. In addition, no priority is set for the digestion of the 1st special figure hold and the digestion of the 2nd special figure hold, and the oldest memorized one of the 1st special figure hold and the 2nd special figure hold is digested in order. It may be a control treatment, that is, a control process of so-called entry order (memory order) digestion.

In addition, it is a type of pachinko gaming machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and is in a ball-entry state in which a game ball can enter and a game ball can enter. It is equipped with a large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry impossible state, and the large winning opening is in a state where it can be entered for a predetermined time when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry to the starting opening is a small hit. When a game ball enters a large winning opening that is ready for a ball and the game ball passes through a specific area, it becomes a big hit and a big hit game is executed, which is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the starting port becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without requiring passage to a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, it is possible to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting port is increased. Further, it is possible to have a first starting port and a second starting port, and to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the ball into the second starting port is increased. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the jackpot probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by inactivating / operating the probability fluctuation function, but the type (number) of jackpot probabilities. Is not limited to this, and for example, three or more kinds of probabilities can be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). May be good. Further, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , Multiple types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low probability and high probability are provided, and any of the multiple types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable) when the power of the game machine is turned on, for example. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) stored in the special figure hold storage unit is read out for the preliminary determination based on the starting ball, and the read acquired random number value (acquired information) is determined. Although it was supposed to be (preliminary judgment) ("Starting ball entry processing (S205)". See FIGS. 11, 13, etc.), the pre-judgment method is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure reservation storage unit, a main control unit or a sub-control unit stores an area (acquisition information storage means) for storing acquisition information (that is, acquisition information acquired based on the start-in ball) to be determined in advance. It may be provided in the RAM of the unit and the acquired information stored in the storage area (predetermination storage unit) may be determined (predetermined). In this case, by storing the result of the pre-determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit, it is possible to erase the acquired information (acquired information stored in another storage area) used for the pre-determination. Alternatively, instead of pre-determining the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, the acquired information acquired based on the start-in ball may be pre-determined. That is, the acquired information may be determined in advance before being stored in the special figure reservation storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquired information to be pre-determined separately from the special figure holding storage unit, and it is also necessary to read the acquired information stored in the special figure holding storage unit for the pre-determination. Absent.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, one image display device 7 (board side display means) is provided as a main liquid crystal (main display device) on the game board side (inside the game area), and the game machine frame side (outside the game area). ) Was provided with two image display devices 71 and 72 (frame-side display means) as sub-liquid crystals (sub-display devices), but sub-liquid crystals (sub-display devices) may be provided on the side of the game board 2. In this case, instead of the two sub liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment, two sub liquid crystals are used as the panel side display means as the main liquid crystal (first image display). It may be provided on the left and right sides of the device 7), or one sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board side instead of one of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (left sub liquid crystal or right sub liquid crystal). Can be done. Alternatively, it is also possible to provide one or more sub-liquid crystals on the game board side while providing the two sub-liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment. is there. This also makes it possible to display various effects with impact by a plurality of image display devices.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display device (first image display device 7) provided on the game board side (inside the game area) and the display device (second image) provided on the game machine frame side (outside the game area). The display device 71 and the third image display device 72) were all image display devices composed of a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display device), but the type of display device is not limited to the liquid crystal display, for example, a drum display device or the like. It is also possible to use a dot display, a 7-segment display, or the like. Further, different types of display devices may be mixed in the plurality of display devices including the main display device and the sub display device. Specifically, for example, among the first to third image display devices shown in the above-described embodiment, the first image display device 7 is a drum display or a 7-segment display, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 71 and the third. The image display device 72 may be used as a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment. Alternatively, the first image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment, and one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be a dot display. As a result, it is possible to display a variety of effects by a plurality of display devices having different display methods, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

[Other]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (Examples) disclosed in the present specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
The conventional game machine is provided with a first starting port, a second starting port, a first large winning opening, and a second large winning opening, and when a game ball enters the first starting port, the first symbol is variablely displayed and the first symbol is displayed. 2 When a game ball enters the starting port, the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, only one of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening is opened, or the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are opened. There was a game machine that executes a big hit game in which the winning openings are opened in a predetermined order (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811).

Further, in the conventional game machine, the second starting port is a variable starting port, the ball entering frequency is lowered in the low base state, and the ball entering frequency is increased in the high base state. Some games were aimed at the 1st starting port, and some games were aimed at the 2nd starting port in the high base state. In addition, there is a game machine that performs a so-called right-handed game in which a game is aimed at the right side area of the game area in a big hit game or a high base state. In such a game machine, in a low base state, a left-handed game is performed, and once the advantageous state is reached, a right-handed game is played until the advantageous state ends, and the game in the advantageous state is sharpened. Met. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the transition mode of the gaming state is uniform, and it has not been possible to provide a highly tasteful game playability.

The present reference invention 1 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and unlike the conventional gaming machine, it provides a highly tasteful gaming state, diversifies the transition mode of the gaming state, and enhances the gaming interest. It provides a game machine.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The third starting port where the game ball can enter and
A first hit / fail determination executing means that executes a first hit / fail determination based on a ball entering the first start port or the second start port, and
A second hit / fail determination execution means for executing a second hit / fail determination to be executed based on the ball entering the third start port, and
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is higher than in the first gaming state. , And the game state setting means that can be set,
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the second hit / fail judgment is a big hit (first specific result), and the first start The mouth is provided in the first game area,
The second starting port and the third starting port are provided in the second gaming area.
A first game (low probability low base state) in which a game ball is launched into the first game area in the first game state and executed mainly based on the first hit / fail determination, and the second game in the second game state. A second game (low accuracy and high base state) in which a game ball is fired into an area and executed mainly based on the first hit / fail determination, and a game ball is fired into the second game area in the first game state to execute the first game ball. 2 It is characterized by having a third game (high accuracy and low base state) that is mainly executed by a hit / fail judgment.

According to such a game machine, a first start port for executing the first hit / fail judgment is arranged in the first game area, and the first hit / fail judgment is executed in the second game area (the first state and the second state). A variable second starting port and a third starting port for executing the second hit / fail determination are arranged. Further, as the gaming state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is low (predetermined frequency) in the first game state, and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is higher than that in the first gaming state. It has a high second gaming state. Then, in the first game state, the first game is launched aiming at the first start port of the first game area and executed mainly by the first hit / fail determination, and in the second game state, the second start port of the second game area is executed. The first game, which is mainly executed by aiming at and executing the first hit / fail judgment, and the second game, which is mainly executed by aiming at the third start port of the second game area in the first game state and executing the second hit / fail judgment. It has one game and.

As a result, the player can play the first game, the second game, and the third game having different game modes according to the transition of the game state, and enhance the game interest by the transition mode of various game states and the new game characteristics. It will be possible. In the first game state, the frequency of ball entry to the first game area and the ball to enter the first start port is higher than the frequency of ball entry to the second game area to enter the second start port. May be higher.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1.
As a result of the first hit / fail determination in the first game in which the game ball is launched into the first game area, the player has a first big hit and a second big hit.
As a result of the first hit / fail determination in the second game in which the game ball is launched into the second game area, the player has a first big hit and a second big hit.
As a result of the second hit / fail determination in the third game in which the game ball is launched into the second game area, the player has a third big hit and a fourth big hit.
In the first game, when the result of the first hit / fail determination is the first big hit, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / miss determination is the second big hit, the third game can be executed. age,
In the second game, when the result of the first hit / fail determination is the first big hit, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / miss determination is the second big hit, the third game can be executed. age,
In the third game, when the result of the second hit / fail determination is the third big hit, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the second hit / miss determination is the fourth big hit, the third game can be executed. It is characterized by the fact that.

According to such a game machine, the result of the first hit / fail determination in the first game in which the game ball is launched into the first game area, and the first hit / fail determination in the second game in which the game ball is launched into the second game area. As a result, it has a first big hit and a second big hit, and has a third big hit and a fourth big hit as a result of the second hit / fail determination in the third game in which the game ball is launched into the second game area. Then, in the first game after the start of the game, when the result of the first hit / fail determination is the first big hit, the second game can be executed, and when the second big hit is reached, the third game can be executed. Further, in the case of the second game, the second game can be executed when the result of the first hit / fail determination in the second game becomes the first big hit, and the third game can be executed when the result becomes the second big hit. Further, in the case of the third game, the second game can be executed when the result of the second hit / fail determination in the third game becomes the third big hit, and the third game can be executed when the result becomes the fourth big hit.

As a result, regardless of whether the first game is a first big hit or a second big hit after the start of the game, the subsequent game is played by firing a game ball into the second game area. Further, regardless of whether the second game or the third game is performed while performing the game to be launched into the second game area, the game (second game) in which the first hit / fail judgment is performed and the second game are performed. 2 It is possible to play a game while shifting the game mode (game state) with the game (third game) for which the hit / fail judgment is performed. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game by changing the transition mode of various game states and new game playability.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2.
In the second game, the second game state becomes the first game state based on the execution of the first hit / fail determination a specific number of times, and the game shifts to the first game. ..

According to such a game machine, when the first hit / fail determination is executed a specific number of times in the second game, the second game state becomes the first game state, and the game shifts to the first game. As a result, the game shifts from the second game to the first game by executing the winning / failing determination a specific number of times. Further, in the game that executes the same first hit / fail determination, the game shifts from the launch game to the second game area to the launch game to the first game area. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game by changing the transition mode of various game states and new game playability.

The third game may be continued even if the second hit / fail determination is executed a specific number of times. In addition, the third game may be continued until the result of the second hit / miss determination is a big hit.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3.
As a result of the second hit / fail determination, a small hit (second specific result) is obtained, and when the small hit is reached, a predetermined amount of game profit can be obtained.
The second hit / fail determination is more likely to be the small hit than the first hit / fail determination.
In the second game, the execution frequency of the first hit / fail determination is higher than that of the first game, so that the reduction speed of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the first game.
The third game is characterized in that the rate of decrease of the game medium is slower than that of the second game by making it possible to obtain a game profit by the small hit.

According to such a game machine, it has a small hit that can obtain a predetermined amount of game profit as a result of the second hit / fail judgment, and the second hit / fail judgment has a higher probability than the first hit / fail judgment. It is supposed to be a hit. That is, the third game has a higher probability of being a small hit than the first and second games. Further, it is assumed that the second game, which is the second game state, has a higher execution frequency of the first hit / miss determination than the first game, which is the first game state. In the second game, the rate of decrease of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the first game, and in the third game, the rate of decrease of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the second game. As a result, the third game is a game that is more advantageous than the second game, and the second game is a game that is more advantageous than the first game. Further, as a result, it is possible to diversify the transition mode among various gaming states having different advantages, and to enhance the gaming interest by new game characteristics. It should be noted that the result of the second hit / fail determination may be a small hit, and the result of the first hit / fail determination may be no small hit.

Further, in the second game state, there may be a fourth game (high accuracy and high base state) in which the game ball is launched into the second game area and the first hit / fail determination is mainly executed. Further, the fourth game may be continued until the next big hit occurs. Further, in the fourth game, the execution frequency of the first hit / fail judgment is higher than that in the first game, so that the decrease speed of the game medium is slower than in the first game, and the third game is a game by a small hit. By making it possible to obtain profits, the rate of decrease of the game medium may be slower than that of the second game and the fourth game. Further, since both the second game and the fourth game are in the second game state, the reduction speed of the game medium may be substantially the same.

Further, in the first game, when the result of the first hit / fail determination is the first jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first hit / fail determination is the second jackpot (corresponding to the second jackpot When the 15R first jackpot and the 4R second jackpot of Example 1 are reached, the third game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1). The fourth game can be executed,
In the second game, when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the first big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big hit of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the second big hit (Example). When the 15R first jackpot and the 4R second jackpot of 1 are reached), the third game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1), the fourth game is executed. Make the game executable
In the third game, when the result of the second hit / fail judgment is the third big hit (corresponding to the 2R 7th big hit of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the second hit / fail judgment is the fourth big hit (Example). When the 15R 5th jackpot of 1 is reached, the 3rd game can be executed, and when the result of the 2nd hit / fail judgment is the 6th jackpot (corresponding to the 2R 6th jackpot of Example 1), the 4th game can be executed. ,
In the fourth game, when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the first big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big hit of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the second big hit (Example). When the 15R first jackpot and the 4R second jackpot of 1 are reached), the third game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1), the fourth game is executed. The game may be executable.

The "decrease rate of the game medium used for the game" is given in the same period from the game medium (fired game ball) used in a unit time (for example, 1 minute) or a unit number of shots (for example, 100 shots). The number obtained by subtracting the game media (paid out prize balls) is calculated as the number of reductions in the game media (game balls). In the first game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game, when the game is played for a predetermined period, the decrease speed of the game medium (game ball, possession ball) owned by the player is in descending order of the decrease speed. , 1st game> 2nd game (4th game)> 3rd game. In the third game, the more the game is continued, the more balls can be held by a small hit, so that the decrease speed can be said to be negative. That is, the first game, the second game, and the fourth game are in a state of playing while reducing the number of balls held, while the third game is in a state of playing while increasing the number of balls held.

In addition, the jackpot type (first jackpot type) when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is a jackpot is more than the jackpot type (second jackpot type) when the result of the second hit / fail judgment is a jackpot. It may be many. In addition, as the third game (high accuracy and low base state) that occurs as a result of the second hit / fail judgment, there are cases where the prize ball is obtained after a jackpot game in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, and a case where the prize ball is acquired. It is assumed that there is a case where the third game is reached after an easy jackpot game. In addition, as the third game (high accuracy and low base state) that occurs as a result of the first hit / fail judgment, there is no case where the prize ball goes through a big hit game in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball. It may be possessed only when it becomes the third game after the jackpot game which is easy to acquire.

Further, the probability of occurrence of a small hit in the second hit / fail determination is set to be higher than the probability of a big hit in the high probability, and the possibility of occurrence of a small hit in the second hit / fail determination can be increased. More preferably, it is desirable that the probability of occurrence of a small hit in the second hit / fail determination is 1/2 or more. Further, the probability of entering the high probability state (probability of operating the probability fluctuation function) is the same in the first hit / fail judgment and the second hit / fail judgment. On the other hand, the probability of entering the state C (high probability / low base state) may be different between the first hit / fail judgment and the second hit / fail judgment, and the state C (high probability / low base state) of the second hit / fail judgment may be obtained. The rush probability of may be higher than that of the first hit / fail judgment. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the launch game to the second game area in which the third game for which the second hit / fail determination is performed can be executed, and to enhance the game interest.

In addition, in the second hit / fail judgment, if a big hit does not enter the state C (high accuracy / low base state), the big hit is the number of prize balls that can be obtained among the big hits (big hit game) in the second hit / fail judgment. Is the least big hit (big hit game). Further, the big hit is a big hit (big hit game) in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained is the smallest among the big hits (big hit game) in the first hit / fail judgment and the second hit / fail judgment.

According to the game machine of the reference invention 1, it is possible to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game by diversifying the transition mode of the game state.

(Reference Invention 2)
In some conventional game machines, a hit / fail judgment is made based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port, and the symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. In such a game machine, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, and if the result of the hit / miss judgment is wrong, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the missed symbol. .. Further, as a symbol, there is a gaming machine having a plurality of symbols of a special symbol and an effect symbol (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-370).

In addition, the special symbol and the effect symbol of the conventional game machine are both variable display and stop display based on the result of the hit / fail determination. In addition, the special symbol shows the result of the hit / fail judgment by stopping and displaying the change display without performing the game effect such as the reach variation, and the effect symbol displays the stop display by performing the game effect such as the reach variation after the variation display. This shows the result of the pass / fail judgment. By having a plurality of symbols in this way, it is possible to control the display according to the purpose of each symbol.

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is not easy to confirm the consistency between the two symbols due to the relationship between the display mode and the display position of the plurality of symbols. The present invention 2 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a fair game machine by facilitating confirmation of a plurality of symbols by displaying a plurality of symbols.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
A winning / failing determination executing means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
The first identification information display unit (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) that variablely displays the first identification information (special symbol) based on the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A second identification information display unit (effect symbol display unit 7b) that variablely displays the second identification information (effect symbol) based on the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A third identification information display unit (variable state indicator 49) that variablely displays the third identification information (state symbol, confirmation symbol) based on the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A game effect display unit (effect symbol display unit 7b, first display screen 7a) capable of displaying a game effect (reach effect, etc.) executed in association with the variable display of the second identification information.
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a specific result.
A first display unit (main display 40) having the first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit, and
It is characterized by including a second display unit (image display device 7, display screen 7a) having the second identification information display unit and the game effect display unit.

According to such a game machine, a first identification information display unit that variablely displays the first identification information (special symbol, first special symbol, second special symbol) and a second identification information (effect symbol) are variablely displayed. It is possible to display the second identification information display unit, the third identification information display unit that displays the third identification information (state symbol, confirmation symbol) in a variable manner, and the game effect executed in accordance with the variable display of the second identification information. It has a game effect display unit. Further, a first display unit including a first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit, and a second display unit including a second identification information display unit and a game effect display unit. It has a department.

This makes it possible to confirm the second identification information indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment and the game effect by checking the second display unit, and based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by checking the first display unit. The first identification information and the third identification information that are variablely displayed can be confirmed.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1.
A game machine that has a game area in which a game ball can flow down, and allows the game ball to flow down into the game area to play a game.
The first display unit is provided inside the game area, and the second display unit is provided outside the game area.

According to such a game machine, a first display unit having a first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit is arranged outside (outside) the game area, and a second identification is performed. A second display unit having an information display unit and a game effect display unit is arranged inside (inside) the game area. As a result, by providing a second display unit in the game area that displays the result of the game effect such as the reach effect and the result of the hit / miss determination, the second display unit is provided while checking the flow of the game ball. It is possible to confirm the display mode of. Further, by arranging the first display unit capable of confirming the first identification information and the third identification information outside the game area separately from the second display unit, the first display unit can be arranged without being confused by the game production or the like. It is possible to surely grasp the display mode of the identification information and the third identification information.

The first display unit is arranged outside the game area (the area outside the rail member that divides the game area), and the second display unit is inside the game area (the area inside the rail member that divides the game area). It may be arranged in.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2.
The first display unit is composed of LEDs, and the second display unit is composed of liquid crystals.
The second display unit is characterized in that it is larger than the first display unit.

According to such a game machine, the first display unit is composed of LEDs, the second display unit is composed of liquid crystals, and the second display unit is a display unit larger than the first display unit. As a result, the display mode of the first display unit can be simplified to ensure that the display modes of the first identification information and the third identification information can be grasped, and the second display unit is larger than the first display unit. In addition, by configuring it with liquid crystal, it is possible to execute a variety of game productions and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3.
A main control unit having the hit / fail determination executing means,
It has a sub-control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs control.
The first identification information display unit constituting the first display unit is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the third identification information display unit and the second display unit constituting the first display unit are displayed by the sub control unit. It is characterized by display control.

Such a game machine has a main control unit and a sub control unit that receives and controls a control signal from the main control unit. Then, among the first display units, the first identification information display unit is display-controlled by the main control unit, and the third identification information display unit is display-controlled by the sub-control unit. Further, the display control of the second display unit that displays the game effect and the second identification information is performed by the sub control unit. That is, the first display unit displays the first identification information whose display is controlled by the main control unit and the third identification information whose display is controlled by the sub control unit. Thereby, by confirming the first display unit, it is possible to confirm both the display modes of the identification information (first identification information and the third identification information) controlled by the main control unit and the sub control unit. Further, this makes it possible to easily confirm the consistency of the identification information controlled by the main control unit and the sub control unit.

The main control unit is a control unit that executes a control related to display control of a special symbol, a control related to a hit / fail judgment, a game related to sensor detection, a control related to the discharge of a prize ball, and a control related to opening and closing of a variable ball entrance, and is a control unit that controls the game. Is. Further, the sub control unit is a control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs predetermined control, and is a main control unit that controls the operation of the movable member and the display control of the effect display unit and other game effects. It is a control unit that is a subordinate of the control unit.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4.
A game information storage means that can store predetermined game information,
Power supply means (power supply board 109) for supplying power and
Based on the detection of a drop in the power supply voltage, the game information stored in the game information storage means can be stored for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped.
A game information recovery means for recovering game information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected based on the game information stored and held by the storage holding means when the power supply means starts power supply is provided.
When the game information recovery means recovers game information, the third identification information display unit recovers faster than the second display unit, and display control can be executed.

According to such a game machine, when the power supply is started, the game information recovery means for recovering the game information when the memory holding means detects a decrease in the power supply voltage based on the game information stored in the memory is provided. .. Then, when the game information is restored, the third identification information display unit possessed by the first display unit is restored earlier than the second display unit so that the display control can be executed. The second display unit is composed of a liquid crystal in order to diversify the game production, and since various display controls are performed, it takes a certain amount of time to restore the game information. On the other hand, since the first display unit (third identification information display unit), which is simply configured by the LED, performs simple display control, it does not take a long time to recover the game information.

As a result, even if the display unit is controlled by the same sub-control unit, the third identification information display unit is restored prior to the second display unit, and the display control can be executed as soon as possible. In addition, this makes it possible to start the game immediately after the start of power supply in accordance with the return of the main control unit, but it takes time to restore the second display unit composed of the liquid crystal (it is still restored even after the start of the game). Not). Even in such a situation, it is possible to confirm the display contents to be displayed and controlled by the sub-control unit by confirming the third identification information display unit which has spread quickly and can start the display control.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention 2, it is possible to facilitate confirmation of a plurality of symbols and to provide a fair gaming machine by displaying a plurality of symbols.

(Reference Invention 3)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
Input means that can be input by the player,
Judgment means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player,
It is provided with an effect control means for controlling an effect based on the determination result of the determination means.
The effect control means
It is possible to change the first setting related to the effect according to the first input to the input means, and to change the second setting related to the effect according to the second input to the input means.
Execute a selection promotion effect that prompts the player to select whether or not to return the effect setting to the default setting.
When input to the input means for making a selection to return the effect setting to the initial setting is made during the selection promotion effect, the second setting is returned to the initial setting, while the first setting is set to the initial setting. It is characterized by not returning to.

According to this configuration, when an input for making a selection to return the effect setting to the initial setting is made during the selection promotion effect, the second setting returns to the initial setting, while the first setting is the initial setting. Not returned to. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience for a player who wants to return the second setting to the initial setting without returning the first setting to the initial setting.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1.
The effect control means
During the selection promotion effect, even if the first input to the input means is performed, the first setting regarding the effect is not changed.

According to this configuration, the first setting is not changed even if the first input is performed during the selection promotion effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the first setting is changed according to the first input during the selection promotion effect, and as a result, the problem of hindering the selection promotion effect occurs. is there.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2.
The effect control means
When an input to the input means for making a selection to return the effect setting to the initial setting is performed during the selection promotion effect, the running selection promotion effect is terminated, and after the selection promotion effect is completed, the input is performed. It is characterized in that the first setting regarding the effect can be changed according to the first input to the means.

By the way, if the change of the first setting according to the first input to the input means is restricted even after the selection promotion effect is completed, the period in which the change of the first setting is restricted becomes longer than necessary. On the contrary, there is a possibility that the convenience will be reduced. On the other hand, according to the above configuration, if the input for making a selection to return the effect setting to the initial setting is made during the selection promotion effect, the selection promotion effect ends, and after the selection promotion effect ends, Since the first setting is changed according to the first input to the input means, it is possible to effectively suppress the above-mentioned problems.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of any of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-3.
The effect control means
When the first time elapses without ending the non-effect progress state after shifting to the non-effect progress state in which the effect based on the determination result of the determination means does not progress, the selection promotion effect is started.
When a second time longer than the first time elapses without ending the non-gaming state after shifting to the non-effect progress state, the first setting related to the effect is returned to the initial setting. It is a thing.

According to this configuration, when the second time elapses without ending the non-production progress state after shifting to the non-production progress state, the first setting returns to the initial setting. Therefore, by setting the second time to an appropriate time, for example, before one player stops the game and another player starts the game, the first setting is returned to the initial setting. It is possible to keep it. Further, since the selection promotion effect is started when the first time elapses without ending the non-effect progress state after shifting to the non-effect progress state, for example, one player stops the game and another player stops the game. When starting the game, it is possible to notify the latter player that the second setting related to the effect has been changed from the initial setting, and whether or not to return the second setting to the initial setting is the latter. It is possible for the player of the game to select it arbitrarily.

(Reference Invention 4)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
Input means that can be input by the player,
Judgment means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player,
It is provided with an effect control means for controlling an effect based on the determination result of the determination means.
The effect control means
It is possible to change the first setting related to the effect according to the first input to the input means, and to change the second setting related to the effect according to the second input to the input means.
When the second setting is changed from the initial setting, a selection promotion effect is executed to prompt the player to select whether or not to return the second setting to the initial setting.
When the first input to the input means is performed when the selection promotion effect is not executed, the selection promotion is permitted while the change of the first setting according to the first input is permitted. It is characterized in that the change of the first setting is restricted during the execution of the effect.

According to this configuration, when the selection promotion effect is not performed, the first setting is changed according to the first input, while during the selection promotion effect, even if the first input is performed. The first setting is not changed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the first setting is changed according to the first input during the selection promotion effect, and as a result, the problem of hindering the selection promotion effect occurs. is there.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1.
The effect control means
After the input to the input means for selecting to return the second setting to the initial setting is performed during the execution of the selection promotion effect, the first input in response to the first input to the input means. It is characterized by allowing the change of the setting of.

According to this configuration, after the input for making a selection to return the second setting to the initial setting is made during the selection promotion effect, the change of the first setting according to the first input is permitted. .. For this reason, it is convenient because the period in which the change of the first setting is restricted becomes longer than necessary while suppressing the change of the first setting in response to the first input from hindering the selection promotion effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as deterioration of sex.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 or 4-2.
The effect control means
When the first time elapses without ending the non-effect progress state after shifting to the non-effect progress state in which the effect based on the determination result of the determination means does not progress, the selection promotion effect is started.
It is characterized in that the first setting is returned to the initial setting when a second time longer than the first time elapses without ending the non-effect progress state after shifting to the non-effect progress state. Is.

According to this configuration, when the second time elapses without ending the non-production progress state after shifting to the non-production progress state, the first setting returns to the initial setting. Therefore, by setting the second time to an appropriate time, for example, before one player stops the game and another player starts the game, the first setting is returned to the initial setting. It is possible to keep it. Further, since the selection promotion effect is started when the first time elapses without ending the non-effect progress state after shifting to the non-effect progress state, for example, one player stops the game and another player stops the game. When starting the game, it is possible to notify the latter player that the second setting related to the effect has been changed from the initial setting, and whether or not to return the second setting to the initial setting is the latter. It is possible for the player of the game to select it arbitrarily.

(Reference Invention 5)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
Input means that can be input by the player,
Judgment means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player,
It is provided with an effect control means for controlling an effect based on the determination result of the determination means.
The effect control means
A plurality of settings related to the effect can be changed according to the input to the input means.
When the plurality of settings are different from the initial settings, the contents of the plurality of settings can be displayed in order in a predetermined first display area.

According to this configuration, when a plurality of settings related to the effect are set different from the initial settings, the contents of the plurality of settings are displayed in order in the first display area. Therefore, compared to the case where the contents of a plurality of settings are displayed side by side, the display area for displaying the contents of the plurality of settings can be reduced, and the player is notified of the contents of the plurality of settings while producing the effect. It is possible to secure a wide display area for displaying an image or the like.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1.
The effect control means
It is characterized in that it is possible to display the number of the plurality of settings having settings different from the initial settings in the second display area adjacent to the first display area.

According to this configuration, the number of multiple settings that are different from the initial settings is displayed in the second display area (close to the first display area), so that the contents of the multiple settings are not displayed at the same time. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that it becomes difficult for the player to recognize how many settings are different from the initial settings.

(Reference Invention 6)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
Judgment means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player,
When the determination is made, the symbol display control means for causing the predetermined symbol display means to display the special symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination.
The effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect based on the determination result of the determination means is provided.
The effect control means
In a predetermined image display means, the effect symbol is variablely displayed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in an manner showing the result of the determination in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol.
During the variable display of the special symbol, as the effect symbol, an effect symbol composed of identification information that can distinguish the effect symbol from other effect symbols and a decorative image added to the identification information is provided. The first display control to display and
During the variable display of the special symbol, a similar image that is not added to the identification information and has the same display content as the decorative image is displayed in a predetermined display area in the image display means, and the similar image is used. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute the second display control that performs the effect.

According to this configuration, during the variable display of the special symbol, a similar image that is not added to the identification information and has the same display content as the decorative image is displayed in a predetermined display area, and an effect using the similar image is displayed. May be done. In this way, since the display contents of the similar image used for the production and the decorative image constituting the production design are common, it seems that the production using the similar image is performed as if the production design is used. It is possible to make the player feel the effect, and it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the effect by the synergistic effect of the effect using the similar image and the effect of displaying the effect pattern.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1.
The effect control means
As the first display control, the effect symbol is variablely displayed in the first variable mode.
As the second display control, after the similar image is variablely displayed in the second variable mode common to the first variable mode, an effect using the similar image displayed in the predetermined display area is performed. It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, the similar image is displayed in a variable manner in the same manner as the effect symbol, so that the player feels that the effect using the similar image is performed as if the effect using the effect symbol is performed. It is possible to improve the effect, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 or Reference Invention 6-2.
The effect control means
After the similar image used for the effect in the second display control is erased from the predetermined display area, the effect symbol formed by having a decorative image whose display content is different from that of the similar image is determined. It is characterized in that the third display control to be displayed in the display area of the above can be further executed.

According to this configuration, after a similar image is erased from a predetermined display area, an effect symbol having a decorative image whose display content is different from that of the similar image is displayed in the predetermined display area. For this reason, it is effective to cause a problem that the player mistakenly recognizes that the same effect symbol as the effect symbol is displayed again in the predetermined display area after a certain effect symbol is displayed in the predetermined display area. It can be suppressed.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine of any of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-3.
The effect control means
When the second display control is executed, after the similar image displayed by the second display control is erased from the image display means, an effect symbol visible to the player is displayed on the image display means. It is characterized by.

According to this configuration, after the similar image is erased from the image display means, the effect symbol is displayed on the image display means in a visible manner. For this reason, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the player mistakenly recognizes that the same effect symbol is displayed multiple times at the same time even though the same effect symbol is not displayed multiple times at the same time. Is.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-5 is the gaming machine of any of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-4.
The effect control means
The production can be executed in any of a plurality of production modes including the first production mode and the second production mode.
While the second display control can be executed during the execution of the effect in the second effect mode, the second display control is not executed during the execution of the effect in the first effect mode. It is characterized by.

According to this configuration, during the execution of the effect in the second effect mode, the second display control that is not performed during the execution of the effect in the first effect mode is executed, so that the second display control is executed, as compared with the first effect mode. It is possible to perform more interesting productions.

(Reference Invention 7)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
Judgment means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player,
When the determination is made, the symbol display control means for causing the predetermined symbol display means to display the special symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination.
The effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect based on the determination result of the determination means is provided.
The effect control means
In a predetermined image display means, an effect symbol composed of a first partial image and a second partial image is variablely displayed with the variable display of the special symbol, and the determination is made with the stop display of the special symbol. The first display control to stop and display the effect symbol in the mode showing the result of
It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a second display control in which the first partial image and the second partial image are individually displayed, and these partial images are combined and displayed as the effect symbol.

According to this configuration, in addition to the case where the effect symbol composed of the first partial image and the second partial image is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed, the first partial image and the second partial image are individually displayed. These partial images may be combined and displayed as an effect pattern. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while guessing which effect symbol is displayed based on the displayed partial image, and the first partial image and the second partial image are still combined. It is possible to effectively improve the interest of the effect of displaying the effect pattern.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1.
The effect control means
After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display of the first partial image, the display of the second partial image is started, and the second display control of synthesizing these partial images and displaying them as the effect symbol is executed. It is characterized by being possible.

According to this configuration, the first partial image is displayed, and when a predetermined time elapses from the start of displaying the first partial image, the display of the second partial image in addition to the first partial image is started, and then these portions are displayed. The images are combined and displayed as a production pattern. In this way, the partial images constituting the effect symbol are displayed in order to display the state in which the effect symbol is formed. Therefore, from the state in which the effect symbol is configured to have the first partial image and the second partial image. It is possible to obtain an extremely high effect as compared with a conventional game machine that does not change.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 or Reference Invention 7-2.
The second partial image is identification information that distinguishes the effect symbol from other effect symbols.
The first partial image is a decorative image that decorates the second partial image.

According to this configuration, the identification information as the second partial image and the decorative image as the first partial image are individually displayed, and these partial images are combined and displayed as an effect pattern. In this way, since the identification information and the decorative image that are separately displayed as the two partial images are combined to form the effect symbol, the effect symbol is simply changed and then stopped and displayed, as compared with the conventional gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an extremely high effect.

It should be noted that any two or more of the above-mentioned Reference Inventions 1 to 7 may be combined.

1 Pachinko game machine, 7a 1st display screen, 7b effect symbol display area, 9c hold icon display area, 9e relevant icon display area, 71a 2nd display screen, 72a 3rd display screen, 7b effect symbol display area (effect symbol display) Part), 8 Directing symbol, 20 1st starting port, 21 2nd starting port, 26 3rd starting port, 30 1st big winning opening, 35 2nd big winning opening, 41a 1st special symbol display (1st special) Symbol display unit), 41b 2nd special symbol display (2nd special symbol display unit), 63a 1st effect button, 63b 2nd effect button, 63c 1st effect button detection switch, 63d 2nd effect button detection switch, 63e Key operation detection switch, 67 speakers, 80 main control board (main control unit), 81 game control microcomputer, 90 sub control board (sub control unit), 91 effect control microcomputer, 100 image control board (image control unit), 101 Image control microcomputer, 103a 3rd effect hold indicator, 103b 4th effect hold indicator, 106 voice control board, 107 lamp control board.

Claims (1)

Input means that can be input by the player,
Judgment means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player,
And a presentation control means for controlling the effect based on the determination result of said determination means,
The effect control means
In the effect progress state in which the effect based on the determination result of the determination means progresses, the first setting related to the effect is changed according to the first input to the input means, and the effect is produced according to the second input to the input means. You can change the second setting for
Selection of whether or not to return the effect setting to the initial setting when the first time elapses without ending the non-effect progress state after shifting to the non-effect progress state in which the effect based on the determination result of the determination means does not progress. Start displaying the selection promotion screen that prompts the player to
If the input to the input means for selecting to return the rendering setup the initial setting is performed during the display of the selection prompt screen, the control section 10 ends displaying of the selected prompt screen, initializing the second set On the other hand, without returning the first setting to the initial setting ,
After the first time elapses after the transition to the non-effect progress state and the display of the selection promotion screen is started, the non-effect progress state does not end while the selection promotion screen remains displayed. When the second time longer than the first time elapses, the first setting is returned to the initial setting, and when the display of the selection promotion screen ends before the second time elapses, the first setting is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the settings can be maintained.

Images